US20020189604A1 - Supported gas barbeque assembly - Google Patents
Supported gas barbeque assembly Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20020189604A1 US20020189604A1 US10/152,720 US15272002A US2002189604A1 US 20020189604 A1 US20020189604 A1 US 20020189604A1 US 15272002 A US15272002 A US 15272002A US 2002189604 A1 US2002189604 A1 US 2002189604A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- members
- cross
- bolt
- barbeque
- support
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A47—FURNITURE; DOMESTIC ARTICLES OR APPLIANCES; COFFEE MILLS; SPICE MILLS; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47J—KITCHEN EQUIPMENT; COFFEE MILLS; SPICE MILLS; APPARATUS FOR MAKING BEVERAGES
- A47J37/00—Baking; Roasting; Grilling; Frying
- A47J37/06—Roasters; Grills; Sandwich grills
- A47J37/07—Roasting devices for outdoor use; Barbecues
- A47J37/0704—Roasting devices for outdoor use; Barbecues with horizontal fire box
- A47J37/0713—Roasting devices for outdoor use; Barbecues with horizontal fire box with gas burners
Definitions
- the present invention relates generally to the field of cooking apparatus, and more particularly to barbeques such as outdoor gas fuelled barbeques.
- barbeque grill manufacturers often ship unassembled barbeques to retailers for subsequent assembly by consumers. While some manufacturers may provide barbeques with a number of components pre-assembled, consumers are generally required to assemble at least some part of the barbeque. This assembly often requires consumers to follow detailed instructions to combine a plurality of barbeque components. These components may include: an upper and lower casting containing burners and a grill, shelves, a console for regulating the flow of fuel to the burners, and a structure for supporting the upper and lower castings. Following assembly of the various barbeque components, a fuel source is connected to the barbeque. The fuel source may be a tank containing pressurized propane, which should be safely secured to the barbeque support structure.
- the support members and one or more of the other components may be securely fastened to one another.
- a typical barbeque may require that over twenty such connections be made by a consumer.
- Common tools such as screwdrivers and wrenches may also be required. Since not all consumers have a facility with such tools or with interpreting assembly instructions for the barbeque, assembly of the barbeque may be a relatively complex and frustrating process, which could take a significant amount of time to complete.
- Difficulty may also be encountered due to the required orientation of fasteners during installation.
- fasteners such as screws or bolts are required to be installed in a generally upward direction. This may necessitate that the consumer crouch beneath a partially assembled barbeque to install additional components or to secure assembled components.
- Use of tools in this position may be difficult for those who do not have dexterity with tools. Even unassisted or manual insertion and tightening of screws or bolts in this position may be difficult.
- a consumer may have to reposition a partially assembled barbeque numerous times during its assembly process if it is desired to install screws or bolts in a more convenient orientation than in a generally upward direction.
- Fully assembled barbeques may alternatively be shipped by manufacturers to retailers to avoid problems associated with the assembly of the barbeque by the consumer.
- a potential drawback of this approach is that the fully assembled barbeque generally requires a significantly larger shipping carton and therefore occupies a greater volume when shipped. As a result, fewer barbeques may be shipped at a time leading to increased shipping costs. Manufacturers also incur increased labour costs in assembling the barbeque themselves.
- connections between two or more of the assembled components may become loosened, for example, by moving the barbeque or through regular use of the barbeque. Loosening may also be caused thermal contraction and expansion of the barbeque components when the barbeque is subject to varying weather conditions or variation in the heat output of the barbeque itself. Imperfections in the manufacture of one or more barbeque components may lead to a barbeque assembly with one or more loose connections, even when the barbeque is intially assembled. Such loosened connections may ultimately cause joined components to become separated, impacting negatively on the operation of the barbeque. For example, the connection between vertical supports and a bridging member joining the supports may loosen, causing the barbeque grill assembly to be unstable.
- the structural members of the barbeque support assembly may themselves elastically yield to a limited extent when a force is applied thereto. This yield may lead to a less rigid barbeque support structure. Indeed in an extreme situation, repeated elastic yielding of a component may lead to its failure.
- the invention consists of a barbeque grill housing support structure.
- the barbeque assembly may have a first member and a second member for supporting the grill housing, and a cross member fastened between the first and second members.
- the first member may be oriented in an initial position relative to the cross member, and a biasing member is attached to the first member and the second member. The biasing member displaces the first member to a biased position in which the first member is displaced from the cross member relative to the initial position.
- respective free ends of the first and second members are displaced from one another along an axis substantially parallel to a longitudinal axis of the cross member when the first member is biased from the initial position to the biased position.
- the biasing member is a barbeque grill housing attached between the first and second members.
- the support structure has a friction system adapted to support displacement of the first member in the biased position.
- the friction system includes a first friction member on the first member, and a second friction member on the biasing member. The first and second friction members frictionally co-operate to support the displacement of the first member in the biased position.
- the first friction member is a post
- the second friction member is an edge of a post hole
- the first member includes a beam connection member having a portion defining a bolt hole therethrough, and the cross member has portions defining a bore therethrough for receiving a bolt. Upon placement of the bolt through the bolt hole and the bore, a friction fit may be provided between the bolt and an edge of the bore when the first member is in the biased position.
- a barbeque grill housing support structure having a first member and a second member for supporting the grill housing, and a cross member fastened between the first and second members to orient the first member in an initial position relative to the cross member.
- a fastener joining the first member and the cross member, and a biasing member attached to the first member and one of the second member and the cross member.
- the biasing member may be in spaced relationship with the fastener, and displacing the first member to a biased position in which the first member is displaced from the cross member.
- a barbeque grill housing support structure having a first member and a second member for supporting the grill housing, and a cross member fastened between the first and second members to orient the first member in an initial position relative to the cross member.
- the cross member is fastened to the first member, and a biasing member attached to the first member and one of the second member and the cross member maintains the first member in a biased position in which the first member is angularly displaced from the cross member relative to the initial position. This arrangement provides additional friction between the first member and the cross member.
- a barbeque grill housing support structure having a first member and a second member for supporting the grill housing, and a cross member fastened between the first and second members to orient the first member in an initial position relative to the cross member.
- the cross member may be fastened to the first member.
- a biasing member attached to the first member and the cross member displacing the first member to a biased position in which the first member is displaced from the cross member relative to the initial position.
- FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of the barbeque according to an illustrative embodiment of the invention
- FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the barbeque according to an alternative illustrative embodiment of the invention.
- FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of supports and a lower casting of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the lower casting of the barbeque of FIG. 1 taken along the line 4 - 4 of FIG. 3;
- FIG. 4A is a partial side view of an end of a bridging member of the barbeque of FIG. 1 showing an alternate welding slot;
- FIG. 4B is a partial top view of the end of the bridging member shown in FIG. 4A;
- FIG. 5 is a side view of a beam connection member of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of beam connection members and a cross beam of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 7 is an assembled perspective view of the beam connection members and cross beam of FIG. 6 showing bolts oriented for insertion;
- FIG. 7A is an exploded partial end view of a beam connection member and bolt of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 7B is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of the beam connection member of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 8 is a partial side view including the beam connection members and cross beam of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 8A is an assembled partial end view of a beam connection member and bolt of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 9 is an exploded partial perspective view including beam connection members, support members and a cross beam of the barbeque of FIG. 2;
- FIG. 10 is a partial perspective view of an alternative embodiment of the beam connection member and cross beam of the barbeque of FIG. 2;
- FIG. 11 is side view of a pin of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 12A is side view of an alternative embodiment of the pin of FIG. 11;
- FIG. 12B is an exploded partial perspective view of a beam connection member, leg extension, caster and legs of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 13A is an end view of a bolt of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 13B is a side view of a bolt of the barbeque of FIG. 13A, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 14A is an end view of an alternative embodiment of the bolt of FIG. 13A;
- FIG. 14B is a side view of the bolt of FIG. 14A, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 15 is a perspective view of a partially assembled barbeque of FIG. 2;
- FIG. 16 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of the beam connection member and tank base of FIG. 2;
- FIG. 17 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of the tank base of FIG. 16;
- FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the tank base of FIG. 17 having strengtheners
- FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of a fuel source retainer of the barbeque of FIG. 2;
- FIG. 20 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of the fuel source retainer of FIG. 19;
- FIG. 21A is an end view of a further alternative embodiment of the fuel source retainer of FIG. 19;
- FIG. 21B is a side view of the fuel source retainer of FIG. 21A;
- FIG. 22 is a top view of an alternative embodiment of a shelf of the barbeque of FIG. 1, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 23 is an end view of the shelf of FIG. 22, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 26 is an exploded partial perspective view of a shelf and support of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 30B is a perspective view of the valve clip and valve opening of FIG. 30A showing the valve clip inserted into the valve opening;
- FIG. 34 is a side view of the lower casting and burner of FIG. 23 showing the burner attached to the lower casting;
- FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the console and leg members of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 36 is a perspective assembled view of the console and leg members of FIG. 35;
- FIG. 36A is a detailed side view of the console of FIG. 36, showing the console and the bridging member, with the leg member shown outlined and transparent;
- FIG. 38 is a perspective assembled view of the console and leg members of FIG. 37;
- FIG. 39A is a side view of a console bolt of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 39B is an end view of the bolt of FIG. 39A;
- FIG. 40 is a partial exploded perspective view of the wheel assembly of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 41 is a cross-sectional view of the wheel assembly of the barbeque of FIG. 1 taken along the line 41 - 41 of FIG. 40;
- FIG. 42A is an exploded perspective view of a axle pin and axle lock of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 42B is an assembled perspective view of an axle pin and axle lock of FIG. 42A;
- FIG. 43A is an exploded perspective view of an axle pin and axle lock of the barbeque of FIG. 2;
- FIG. 44 is a partial side view of the barbeque of FIG. 2 showing an alternative fuel source retainer, and showing the beam connection member outlined and transparent;
- FIG. 46B is a side view of the mounting bracket of FIG. 46A;
- FIG. 47A is an isolated end view of an engaging member of the alternative fuel source retainer of FIG. 44;
- FIG. 47B is a side view of the engaging member of FIG. 47A;
- FIG. 47E is a cross-sectional view of the engaging member of FIG. 47A taken along the line 47 E- 47 E of FIG. 47C;
- FIG. 47G is a perspective view of the engaging member of FIG. 47A with an elongated shim
- FIG. 48A is a side view of a fuel tank retaining bolt of the barbeque of FIG. 2;
- FIG. 48B is an end view of the fuel tank retaining bolt of FIG. 48A;
- FIG. 50A is an end view of a wing nut of the barbeque of FIG. 2, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 50C is another end view of the wing nut of FIG. 50A viewed from a direction opposite to the end view of FIG. 50A, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 52A is an isolated end view of a burner support member of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 52B is a side view of the burner support member of FIG. 52A;
- FIG. 53A is a transparent top view of the burner tray of FIG. 28 additionally including a bracket;
- FIG. 53B is a side view of the burner tray of FIG. 53A;
- FIG. 54 is a detailed view of the burner tray of FIG. 53A identified by the reference numeral 54 in FIG. 53C;
- FIG. 55 is a detailed view of the burner tray of FIG. 53A identified by the reference numeral 55 in FIG. 53C
- FIG. 55A is a top view of the shelf of FIG. 22 showing an alternative conduit of the shelf in phantom;
- FIG. 55B is an isolated cross-sectional view of the conduit of the shelf of FIG. 55A taken along the line 55 B- 55 B;
- FIG. 56 is a side view of the panel of the barbeque of FIG. 2, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 57 is an end view of a bracket of the panel FIG. 56, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 59 is another perspective view of the valve clip of FIG. 58 viewed from a direction opposite to the perspective view of FIG. 58;
- FIG. 60A is an isolated top view of a beam connection member FIG. 2;
- FIG. 60C is a side view of the beam connection member of FIG. 60A, showing hidden features in phantom;
- FIG. 61A is an isolated side view of an alternative axle lock of the barbeque of FIG. 1, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 61B is another isolated side view of axle lock of FIG. 61A, viewed from a direction transverse to the side view of FIG. 61A, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 61C is an end view of axle lock of FIG. 61A, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 61D is a cross-sectional view of the axle lock of FIG. 61C taken along the line 61 D- 61 D.
- FIG. 62A is an isolated side view of an alternative axle lock of the barbeque of FIG. 2, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 62B is another isolated side view of axle lock of FIG. 62A, viewed from a direction transverse to the side view of FIG. 62A, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 62C is an end view of axle lock of FIG. 62A, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 62D is a cross-sectional view of the axle lock of FIG. 62C taken along the line 62 D- 62 D;
- FIG. 62E is a cross-sectional view of the axle lock of FIG. 62B taken along the line 62 E- 62 E;
- FIG. 63 is an isolated cross-sectional side view of a wheel and alternative axle pin of the barbeque of FIG. 1, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 64B is a top view of the burner support member of FIG. 64A;
- FIG. 64C is a side view of the burner support member of FIG. 64A;
- FIG. 65 is an isolated top view of a lower casting of the barbeque of FIG. 1, showing casting openings for receiving the burner support member of FIG. 52A;
- FIG. 66 is an isolated view of a burner support member of FIG. 52A, which includes a member for attaching it to a burner;
- FIG. 68 is an isolated top view of the burner support member and casting portion of FIG. 67;
- FIG. 69A is a side view of the alternative axle pin of FIG. 63;
- FIG. 69B is an end view of the axle pin of FIG. 69A;
- FIG. 70A is a side view of an alternative axle pin of the barbeque of FIG. 2;
- FIG. 70B is an end view of the axle pin of FIG. 70A;
- FIG. 71A is an isolated side view of an alternative embodiment of a threaded post of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 71B is an isolated end view of the threaded post of FIG. 71A;
- FIG. 72 is an isolated side view of an alternative nut of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 73A is a top view of the valve clip of FIG. 29;
- FIG. 73B is an end view of the valve clip of FIG. 29;
- FIG. 73C is an side view of the valve clip of FIG. 29;
- FIG. 73D is a bottom view of the valve clip of FIG. 29;
- FIG. 73E is a cross-sectional view of the valve clip of FIG. 29, taken along the line 73 E- 73 E of FIG. 73C;
- FIG. 74 is a side view of support members and cross beam of the barbeque of FIG. 2 wherein the support members are biased towards the cross beam in an initial position;
- FIG. 75 is a side view of support members and cross beam of the barbeque of FIG. 2 wherein the support members are biased away from the cross beam in an alternate initial position;
- FIG. 76 is a side view of the support members of FIG. 74 wherein a biasing member in the nature of a lower casting is positioned in preparation for moving the support members to a biased position;
- FIG. 77 is a side view of the support members of FIG. 76 in a biased position, and being maintained in place by the lower casting.
- the illustrative embodiment of the claimed invention includes a barbeque 60 having a support structure which has first and second support members 62 , 64 , and a cross member in the nature of a cross beam 66 rigidly connected therebetween.
- a preparation or storage surface in the nature of first and second shelves 68 ′, 70 ′ may be included.
- a panel such as an accessory panel 72 may be provided.
- a grill housing 74 having opposed castings 76 and 78 that enclose a burner 80 , is supported by the support members 62 , 64 .
- a cooking surface or cooking grid, in the nature of one or more grill plates 82 , and a warming rack 84 may also be contained within the grill housing 74 .
- a fuel flow controller for instance console 86 , may be provided to moderate the flow of fuel to the burner 80 .
- a heat deflector such as angled bars 88 may also be included.
- a self-contained fuel source including a fuel container, for example, such as a propane tank 90 , then a fuel source or container support base 92 may be employed to support tank 90 . If an external fuel source, such as piped natural gas, is used then base 92 may be omitted, and support members 62 and 64 may have a substantially identical or mirror configuration of one another. Relocation of the barbeque 60 may be facilitated by the addition of wheels 94 and/or casters 96 .
- Support member 62 may be configured to be substantially identical to support member 64 , and may have a mirror configuration to support 64 .
- support members 62 , 64 differ in that support member 64 is provided with a fuel source support base 92 . Except for the description of support base 92 , the description of support member 62 generally applies to support member 64 , unless otherwise noted.
- Support member 62 has two leg members 98 and 100 .
- the leg members 98 , 100 are substantially cylindrical, and may be hollow to reduce cost and weight. If leg members 98 , 100 are made of a metal, such as steel tubing, they may have an external diameter of 13 ⁇ 8 inches and a wall thickness of 0.036 inches. Leg members having other dimensions may also be used as long as sufficient structural support for barbeque 60 is provided.
- legs 98 and 100 may have substantially rectangular cross sections.
- leg members 98 and 100 may be configured as leg members 98 ′ and 100 ′ having a generally square cross-section with one inch sides, as is shown in FIG. 2.
- leg members 98 , 100 may be joined to each other by at least one member, such as bridging member 102 .
- Bridging member 102 may be connected to leg members 98 , 100 either by spot welding, bolting, riveting or in some other appropriate manner known to those in this art.
- bridging member 102 has one, and preferably two, slots 106 and 108 therethrough. Slots 106 and 108 laterally traverse bridging member 102 and are positioned to receive a weld therethrough for attaching leg members 98 and 100 to the bridging member 102 . To conserve weld material, the width of slots 106 and 108 may be made narrow enough to receive a standard weld.
- an alternate weld slot such as slot 106 a may be used to strengthen the weld formed between bridging member 102 and leg 98 .
- slot 106 a is rotated about its centroid so that the weld material applied through slot 106 a attaches to leg 98 at both sides of a longitudinal centerline of leg 98 , whereas slot 106 directs the weld material to an orientation that is substantially parallel to a longitudinal centerline of leg 98 .
- the rotation of slot 106 a is preferably approximately 10 degrees.
- An abutting member or saddle having protrusions or wings 115 for abutting leg 98 may be added to, or integrally formed with, bridging member 102 so that bridging member 102 is closer to leg 98 adjacent the location of a weld. Wings 115 may also facilitate the positioning of leg 98 relative to slot 106 a before a weld is applied. Wings 115 are preferably stamped, embossed or otherwise integrally formed with bridging member 102 so that they protrude from bridging member 102 to abut and conform to a portion of the periphery of leg 98 . As shown in FIG. 4B, wings 115 may have an arcuate cross section which conforms to a portion of leg 98 .
- a weld may be applied to both sides of a longitudinal centerline of leg 98 to attach bridging member 102 thereto by including two substantially parallel slots in bridging member 102 , instead of one slot such as slot 106 a .
- the two slots are preferably oriented adjacent one another and are generally parallel to a longitudinal centerline of leg 98 .
- Bridging member 102 may then be welded to leg 98 through each slot.
- leg members 98 and 100 By joining leg members 98 and 100 using bridging member 102 , a substantially rigid structure is created, with leg members 98 and 100 preferably oriented generally parallel to one another, and bridging member 102 may be generally perpendicular to leg members 98 and 100 .
- legs 98 and 100 When in their operative position, legs 98 and 100 preferably are generally vertically oriented, and may rest on their respective base ends 110 and 112 . Alternatively, leg members 98 and 100 may rest on wheels 94 , casters 74 , leg extensions 114 or other terminating elements as are known to those skilled in the art.
- leg members 98 and 100 may be substantially uniformly spaced from each other by a distance corresponding generally to a width W of the grill housing 74 . It will be appreciated by those versed in the art that a wider spacing for the leg members 98 and 100 may provide greater stability to barbeque 60 , while a narrower spacing could make barbeque 60 top-heavy and prone to tipping. For example, if a narrower grill housing is used (not shown), the spacing between leg members 98 and 100 as configured for a larger housing 74 may be appropriate, and may provide greater stability to barbeque 60 than if a spacing approximating the width of the narrower grill housing was used.
- a cross member in the nature of cross beam 66 , joins first support member 62 to second support member 64 to form a substantially rigid structure for supporting grill housing 74 , and other components of the barbeque 60 .
- cross beam 66 may be of a length which is approximately the same as that of the grill housing 74 .
- cross beam 66 may be approximately 18 inches long. This ensures that support members 62 and 64 may be attached to grill housing 74 generally below and approximately aligned with opposite sides of the grill housing 74 .
- Cross beam 66 may have a uniform lateral cross-section that is generally rectangular in shape, for example, having two respective opposed sides of three-inch width and two respective opposed sides of four inch width, or sides all having a similar width such as 21 ⁇ 2 inches.
- beam 66 may have a cross-sectional configuration which is polygonal, round, or non-uniform in shape.
- the beam 66 may be hollow.
- a rigid plastic, or a metal, whether formed by injection moulding, extrusion, bending, or some other appropriate process, is preferably used to construct cross beam 66 .
- cross beam 66 is generally linear in the illustrative embodiment of the invention, it may have angles or curves formed therein for orienting the beam 66 for attachment to each support member 62 or 64 , as described in greater detail below.
- FIG. 2 shows an alternative cross beam 66 ′ used in an embodiment of the invention.
- a beam connection member 116 having a strut 118 with a beam receptacle 120 defined therein, connects beam 66 to support member 62 .
- a second beam connection member 122 having a beam receptacle 124 , connects beam 66 to support member 64 .
- Beam connection members 116 and 122 are similar in configuration except that at least one of the beam connection members, for example beam connection member 122 , may be configured to have a fuel source support base 92 for supporting a fuel container such as a propane tank 90 , as described below.
- beam connection members 116 and 122 may alternatively be configured identically to one another or as mirror images of one another (not shown). Aside from the possible consideration of a fuel source support base 92 , the following description of beam receptacle 120 , applies to beam receptacle 124 as well, unless otherwise indicated.
- Beam receptacle 120 has an open end 126 for receiving an end 128 of cross beam 66 .
- Beam receptacle 120 may also have a closed end 130 which is opposed to open end 126 prevents cross beam 66 from being inserted into the receptacle 120 any further. Closed end 130 also provides feedback by way of abutment of cross beam 66 there against to indicate that beam 66 is fully inserted, and ready to be secured.
- beam receptacle 120 has walls 132 that, in conjunction with closed end 130 , define receptacle 120 as substantially the same shape, and at least the same size as end 128 of cross beam 66 .
- receptacle 120 may have one continuous wall.
- Beam connection member 116 may be made from a metal, plastic or other suitable material known to those in this art. If made from a plastic, it may be integrally formed by injection moulding or extrusion.
- an alternative embodiment of beam connection member 116 ′ is formed as a strut 118 ′ having a generally inverted U-shaped cross-section.
- Strut 118 ′ may be attached between leg members, such as leg members 98 ′ and 100 ′; as described below.
- Arms 136 (whose lower longitudinal edge is shown in a phantom line) and 138 of the U-shaped cross-section are preferably substantially at right angles to base 140 of the U-shaped cross-section.
- Strut 118 ′ is preferably attached between leg members 98 ′ and 100 ′ adjacent leg member base ends 110 ′ and 112 ′.
- arms 136 and 138 When attached between leg members 98 ′ and 100 ′, arms 136 and 138 may be generally parallel to the longitudinal axes of the leg members, and the U-shaped cross section preferably opens in the general direction of leg member base ends 110 ′ and 112 ′ (FIG. 2).
- Arm 138 may have an opening 142 formed therein for receiving beam end 128 ′.
- Opening 142 preferably is substantially the same size as a lateral cross-section of beam end 128 ′ so as to mate therewith.
- opening 142 may correspond to the general shape of just three sides of beam end 128 ′, to define a generally right-angled U-shaped opening 142 .
- Cross beam 66 ′ may be attached to strut 118 ′ by first inserting beam end 128 ′ into opening 142 until beam end 128 ′ abuts arm 136 of strut 118 ′.
- Arm 136 of strut 118 ′ may additionally have a supporting member attached thereto for supporting beam end 128 ′.
- the supporting member may be in the form of a substantially perpendicular flange 144 along a free end 146 (shown as a phantom line) of arm 136 , the flange 144 being generally directed towards opening 142 .
- Beam end 128 ′ may rest on flange 144 once beam end 128 ′ abuts arm 136 .
- opening 142 When fully inserted into opening 142 , movement of beam end 128 ′ is inhibited by arm 136 , flange 144 of arm 136 , base 140 of strut 118 ′ and edges of opening 142 .
- a transverse indent 148 in base 140 between arm 138 and opening 142 may also receive and align a portion of beam end 128 ′.
- opening 142 may additionally have a flange such as a peripheral flange (not shown) for abutting cross beam 66 ′.
- base 140 of strut 118 ′ may be widened at a mid-section 150 of strut 118 ′.
- Mid-section 150 may widened in a direction generally away from arm 136 or away from arm 138 , or in both directions. While strut 118 ′ maintains its U-shaped cross-section in this configuration, arms 136 and 138 are closer to one another at the ends 152 of strut 118 ′ and become gradually further apart to a maximum when adjacent mid-section 150 .
- beam connection member 116 ′ then projects from the plane of legs 98 and 100 in a similar direction as an attached shelf 68 (or 68 ′ or 68 ′′). This may enable a support member such as support member 62 ′ having a shelf 68 ′′ and a beam connection member 116 ′ to occupy a smaller volume when placed in a container such as a shipping box (not shown) than if mid-section 150 projected in an opposite direction.
- Beam end 128 ′ may be attached to strut 118 ′ using at least one fastener, such as a bolt 154 , which is inserted through a hole 156 in base 140 and a corresponding bore 158 in beam end 128 ′.
- a fastener such as a bolt 154
- hole 156 and bore 158 are preferably aligned to receive bolt 154 .
- Hole 156 and bore 158 are aligned and may be generally vertically oriented to permit insertion of bolt 154 in a downward direction. This arrangement permits bolt 154 to rest within both hole 154 and bore 158 , while also, to a limited extent, securing base 140 to beam end 128 ′.
- a manually securable bolt retainer such as a wing nut 160 or some other manually tightenable fastener.
- the terms “unassisted”, “manual”, “manually”, “by hand”, or other similar terms indicate that the component or components described may be installed, attached or otherwise arranged without assistance of any mechanical advantage, including the use of tools or other implement. However, while unassisted installation of a component is preferred, it is not necessary. An appropriate tool or tools may optionally be used.
- bolt 154 may have a widened head 157 for abutting a greater portion of beam connection member 116 ′. By contacting a greater portion of beam connection member 116 ′, movement of installed bolt 154 may be further inhibited, which in turn may reduce movement of retained cross beam 66 ′ relative to beam connection member 116 ′.
- Rotational movement of bolt 154 may be limited by a portion 159 of a bolt shaft 161 defining a non-rotatable shape.
- Shaft portion 159 may be located adjacent head 157 .
- At least hole 156 (see also FIG. 9) may be configured to have substantially the same shape as defined by a periphery of shaft portion 159 to permit shaft portion 159 to be located therein. Because shaft portion 159 is non-rotatable, and may be located within similarly sized hole 156 , shaft 161 may be inhibited from rotating, for example, when nut 160 is threaded and tightened thereon.
- shaft portion 159 has a substantially rectangular cross section and hole 156 is similarly configured to be generally rectangular in shape.
- nut 160 is shown with wings 163 extending in a direction generally perpendicular to nut body 165 . Increased leverage for turning nut 160 may be obtained by angling wings 163 away from a central axis of nut 160 (not shown).
- Nut 160 may additionally include a nub 167 for gripping sides of a corresponding rebate 169 in beam end 128 ′.
- Nub 167 protrudes from nut body 165 in a direction substantially opposite to the direction of the protrusion of wings 163 , and may be tapered, being wider adjacent nut body 165 .
- Rebate 169 may be similarly tapered but marginally smaller than nub 167 .
- rebate 169 is marginally smaller than nub 167 , and both rebate 169 and nub 167 are similarly tapered, friction between nub 167 and sides of rebate 169 gradually increases. Once nub 167 is tightened within rebate 169 , loosening of nut 160 , for example due to movement of barbeque 40 , may be inhibited.
- Tapered rebate 169 may also guide nub 167 into position as nut 160 is tightened.
- Beam connection member 116 ′ is preferably made from a single sheet of metal, which may be cut and then bent to define the elements described above. Beam connection member 116 ′ may alternatively be made of plastic or other suitable material, as known to those skilled in this art.
- a further alternative beam connection member 116 ′′ preferably made of metal, has two walls 132 ′′ protruding substantially perpendicular to a strut 118 ′′ of beam connection member 116 ′′.
- Walls 132 ′′ are respectively preferably located to abut top and bottom opposite sides of end 128 ′′ of cross beam 66 ′′, as shown in FIG. 10.
- the walls 132 ′′ may respectively alternatively be oriented (not shown) to abut opposite sides of cross beam end 128 ′′ other than the said top and bottom opposite sides.
- Each wall 132 ′′ has at least one hole 162 passing therethrough for receiving a fastener such as bolt 164 .
- Holes 162 have collinear axes and align with a bore 166 (shown in phantom lines) in cross beam end 128 ′′.
- bolt 164 may be inserted therethrough and manually secured at a free end using a wing nut 168 or some other manually tightenable fastener.
- wall holes 162 and bore 166 are aligned and preferably generally vertically oriented to permit insertion of bolt 164 in a downward direction.
- This arrangement permits bolt 164 to rest within holes 162 and bore 166 , while partially securing walls 132 ′′ to beam end 128 ′. Wing nut 168 may then be conveniently attached and tightened causing walls 132 ′′ to urge against beam end 128 ′′.
- Beam connection member 116 ′′ may be constructed from a single generally planar sheet of metal having two bends formed therein to define walls 132 ′′ and strut portion 118 ′′. The beam connection member 116 ′′ may then be welded to leg members such as leg members 98 and 100 .
- Beam connection member 116 may be rigidly attached to at least one, and preferably both, of the leg members 98 , 100 . If beam connection member 116 is attached to both leg members 98 , 100 , then the connection member 116 may provide structural support to support member 62 . Strut 118 of beam connection member 116 spans leg members 98 and 100 , and may be secured to leg members 98 and 100 at its ends 152 which may have portions defining two conduits 170 . Each conduit 170 may be attached to, or be integral with, the respective ends 170 of strut 118 . Strut 118 , bridging member 102 and legs 98 and 100 , preferably, combine to form a ladder-like configuration.
- each leg member 98 , 100 is inserted through a respective conduit 170 .
- the conduits 170 preferably have a lateral cross-section substantially equal to or larger than the size and shape of the lateral cross-section of the respective leg members 98 , 100 . This permits the leg members to be inserted through conduits 170 . If the cross-sections of the conduits 170 and leg members 98 , 100 are substantially the same size, then a friction fit may be formed between the each conduit 170 and leg member 98 , 100 .
- the axes of conduits 170 are moved along the longitudinal axis of the leg members 98 , 100 .
- Conduits 170 may be secured to leg members 98 , 100 using pins 172 (see FIG. 11). Each conduit 170 has a hole 174 passing laterally therethrough for receiving a pin 172 . Hole 174 has an entry 174 a and an exit 174 b . Similarly, each leg member 98 , 100 has a hole 176 , passing laterally therethrough for receiving pin 172 . Hole 176 has an entry 176 a and an exit 176 b . To install pin 172 , the respective entries 174 a , 176 a and exits 174 b , 176 b are aligned. The pin 172 may then be inserted therein to hinder movement of the conduit 170 relative to leg member 98 , 100 .
- an alternative fastener such as slotted pin 186 may be used to attach strut 118 to leg members 98 , 100 .
- slotted pin 186 is installed in a similar manner as described for pin 172 .
- Slotted pin 186 preferably has a head 188 , which is larger than entry 174 a to inhibit movement of pin 186 along its longitudinal axis within the holes 174 , 176 .
- Pin 186 may also have a catch 189 to inhibit longitudinal movement of pin 186 within the holes 174 , 176 .
- Catch 189 is located at the insertion end 190 of pin 186 .
- End 190 is located opposite to head 188 .
- Catch 186 may be marginally larger than exit hole 176 b to inhibit pin 186 from being removed once end 190 is fully inserted therethrough.
- end 190 may be tapered.
- end 190 may have at least one and preferably three partially transverse slots 192 emanating from a central longitudinal axis of pin 186 . Each slot 192 is preferably uniformly angularly displaced from the other.
- slots 192 permit end 190 to narrow, facilitating passage of catch 186 , therethrough.
- Slotted pin 186 may be made of a resilient material such as a plastic so that end 190 returns to its original shape once it passes through exit hole 174 b to enable catch 189 to inhibit removal of pin 186 .
- strut 118 may be secured to leg members 98 , 100 .
- an axial portion of conduit 170 may be removed to form a yoke (not shown).
- the yoke may be snapped onto a leg member 98 , 100 , and pinned in place as described above.
- the insertion end 182 of pin 178 may have a lateral hole therethrough for receiving a retaining clip or cotter pin (not shown) which further inhibits movement of pin 178 along its longitudinal axis.
- strut portion 118 ′ may be secured to the leg members 98 , 100 by one or more welds, as long as legs members 98 and 100 are also made of a metal.
- ends 152 ′ of strut 118 ′ may have concave rebates 194 , instead of having conduits 170 .
- Concave rebates 194 may be arcuate and have substantially the same radius as leg members 98 , 100 which have round cross-sections.
- Strut 118 ′ may also be welded to leg members having rectangular cross-sections, such as leg members 98 ′ and 100 ′. As long as the leg member 98 ′, 100 ′ is wider than the distance between edges 196 of the arcuate rebate 194 , strut 118 ′ may be welded to leg members 98 ′, 100 ′ along edges 196 .
- strut portion 118 is preferably attached so that it is substantially perpendicular to legs 98 and 100 .
- Walls 132 of beam receptacle 120 are preferably oriented so that the received cross beam 66 is substantially perpendicular to both strut 118 and legs 98 , 100 . Similar relationships between the analogous structural elements of the alternative embodiments are also preferred.
- beam connection members 116 , 122 extend and combine to form a unitary beam connection member 197 .
- Unitary beam connection member 197 does not have beam receptacles 120 , 124 , nor is a cross beam 66 included.
- the beam connection members 116 a and 122 a of each support member 62 , 64 are integral with one another, having a joining portion 199 therebetween.
- the joining portion may be bifurcated (not shown). The bifurcation is preferably located equidistant from each connection member 116 a and 122 a .
- the bifurcated joining portion may be assembled using connectors such as threaded receptacles and bolts that may preferably be manually installed.
- the free ends of the bifurcated joining portion may be configured to have a releasable snap fit or friction fit to permit unassisted joining and separation of the connection members.
- a beam securing apparatus 198 of beam connection member 116 secures beam 66 within receptacle 120 .
- Beam connection member 122 may have a similar configuration to beam connection member 116 , and is discussed in greater detail below.
- the beam securing apparatus 198 includes a fastener for attaching receptacle 120 to beam 66 .
- the fastener may be a manually installable fastener, such as bolt 200 (FIG. 13A and 13B) that may be installed and tightened by hand.
- Bolt 200 may additionally be loosened and removed by hand.
- the beam securing apparatus 198 also includes an opening or passage, in the nature of a hole 202 defined in one of walls 132 and passing therethrough.
- a shaft 201 of bolt 200 having a threaded end 204 may be inserted through hole 202 , and may be received by a bolt retainer in the nature of a corresponding bore of the beam securing apparatus 198 , which may be a bushing 206 , fixed in the cross beam 66 .
- Bushing 206 preferably has internal threads 207 for threaded engagement with the threaded end 204 .
- Hole 202 is smaller than a head 208 of bolt 200 to inhibit head 208 from passing through hole 202 .
- an end 128 of cross beam 66 when inserted into receptacle 120 , it may be secured to a wall 132 of receptacle 120 by bolt 200 , inserted through hole 202 , into bushing 206 , and tightened by hand.
- at least one of the walls 132 is an attachment wall 210 , and the hole 202 passes through attachment wall 210 . While the hole 202 is located in a wall 210 , additional holes 202 may be located in other walls 132 to receive additional screws 96 . Similarly, more than one hole 202 may be included in the same wall 132 .
- the beam securing apparatus 198 may include a protrusion in the nature of a raised collar 212 which may be used to limit movement of bolt 200 once the bolt 200 is tightened.
- the collar 212 is co-axial with hole 202 , and protrudes away from the inside 214 of receptacle 120 .
- Head 208 of bolt 200 has a generally annular void 216 for matingly receiving collar 212 .
- Void 216 is coaxial with threaded end 204 of bolt 200 , and is open adjacent the point of attachment 218 of threaded end 204 and screw head 208 .
- Void 216 has an internal surface 220 defining a shape that is congruent to and substantially the same size as collar 212 .
- the shape of void 216 need not be uniform, nor does it have to correspond precisely to the shape of collar 212 .
- void 216 and collar 212 need only be sufficiently similar to permit threaded end 204 of bolt 200 to be inserted through the hole 202 , into threaded bushing 206 , and tightened to cause collar 212 to enter void 216 and to come into sufficient contact with portions of internal surface 220 to inhibit movement of the bolt 200 . If void 216 is slightly smaller than collar 212 then a friction fit may be formed between internal surface 220 and collar 212 . If void 216 is made to be too small, or if it is a substantially different shape than collar 212 , then collar 212 may be inhibited from entering void 216 and bolt 200 may not be turned and threaded, or it may only be partially threaded, into bushing 206 , which is undesirable.
- Beam securing apparatus 198 may also include a slot 224 located in attachment wall 210 to facilitate increasing the friction between receptacle walls 132 and beam end 128 .
- slot 224 As slot 224 is narrowed, the internal perimeter of receptacle 120 , as defined by walls 132 , decreases, causing the walls 132 to grip the beam end 128 . This gripping may reduce movement of receptacle 120 relative to beam 66 , and, by connection, movement of support member 62 relative to beam 66 .
- Slot 224 passes through collar 212 and adjacent attachment wall 210 to create collar pieces 212 a and 212 b , and adjacent wall portions 210 a and 210 b .
- Slot 224 may be oriented substantially perpendicular to the internal perimeter of the receptacle 120 as defined by walls 132 . While slot 224 may pass through collar 212 at a chord, it preferably bisects the collar 212 into two substantially equal pieces 212 a and 212 b . To facilitate movement of collar pieces 212 a and 212 b relative to one another, so that beam end 128 may be gripped, slot 224 preferably extends to an edge of receptacle 120 adjacent open end 126 .
- Movement of collar pieces 212 a and 212 b may be further facilitated by increasing the length of slot 224 .
- Increasing the width of the slot 224 between adjacent portions 210 a and 210 b may also facilitate movement of collar pieces 212 a and 212 b .
- slot 224 may be lengthened and widened adjacent collar pieces 212 a and 212 b to form a window 226 in attachment wall 210 .
- the window 226 may be generally rectangular, having one inch and three inch sides. Other sizes and shapes created by lengthening and/or widening slot 224 may facilitate varying degrees of relative movement of collar pieces 212 a and 212 b.
- bolt 200 is installed while maintaining the position of pieces 212 a and 212 b .
- proximate collar pieces 212 a and 212 b enter void 216 .
- the shape of void 216 is preferably similar to the combined shape of proximate collar pieces 212 a and 212 b .
- Bolt 200 and collar pieces 212 a and 212 b may be configured to cause beam end 128 to be progressively clamped as bolt 200 is tightened. This may be achieved by configuring the annular void 216 of the bolt 200 to be narrower at a closed end 228 of void 216 , and to be progressively wider at an open end 230 of void 216 .
- Annular void 216 has an outer circumferential surface 222 a and an inner circumferential surface 222 b .
- outer circumferential surface 222 a is angled, at 10 degrees for example, relative to the axis of threaded end 204 .
- outer surface 222 a is further from threaded end 204 at open end 230 of the void than it is at closed end 228 .
- the diameter of outer circumferential surface 222 a is approximately one inch adjacent open end 230 .
- Inner circumferential surface 222 b may be angled in a direction opposite to that of surface 222 a , or it may be parallel to the axis of threaded end 204 . Due to the orientation of surfaces 222 a and 222 b , void 216 tapers to closed end 228 .
- collar pieces 212 a and 212 b are positioned together to form collar 212 , they are preferably configured to be substantially the same size and shape, and preferably marginally larger than, annular void 216 . Accordingly, collar pieces 212 a and 212 b have outer circumferential surface portions 232 a and 232 b . When collar pieces 212 a and 212 b are positioned apart, free ends 234 a and 234 b of the respective collar pieces 212 a and 212 b are preferably positioned for engagement by open end 230 of void 216 . This permits free ends 234 a and 234 b to be inserted into void 216 as threaded end 204 of bolt 200 is inserted into hole 202 .
- Bolt 200 may be manually tightened to the point that collar pieces 212 a and 212 b are at least partially retained by void 216 .
- This arrangement permits the cross beam end 128 to be gripped by walls 132 forming a substantially rigid connection between cross beam 66 and support member 62 , without the need for tools.
- the connection may be made using one bolt 200 at each end 128 of cross beam 66 . Because collar pieces 212 a and 212 b together are marginally larger than void 216 , a tight fit is formed between the screw head 208 and collar pieces 212 a , 212 b to inhibit loosening of bolt 200 .
- slot 224 may be wider at slot portion 236 a which is adjacent open end 126 of receptacle 120 .
- a narrow portion 236 b of slot 224 may become closed before bolt 200 is fully installed, while wide portion 236 a is just narrowed.
- the force exerted by bolt 200 on collar pieces 212 a , 212 b is increased.
- slot wide portion 236 a This forces slot wide portion 236 a to narrow further, reducing the internal perimeter of the receptacle 120 , as defined by walls 132 , and causing the walls 132 increase their grip on beam end 128 adjacent to receptacle open end 126 .
- slot wide portion 236 a may be 0.10 inches across
- slot narrow portion 236 b may be 0.06 inches across.
- the outer surface 222 a of void 216 may be configured to define other shapes such as a concave or convex taper (not shown) or some other, preferably uniform, shape that permits the bolt 200 to be installed while at the same time forcing collar pieces 212 a and 212 b closer to one another so that beam end 128 may be gripped.
- void 216 and the corresponding configuration of collar pieces 212 a , 212 b may be varied to achieve the same effect as described above.
- outer surface 222 a defines void 216 which tapers to closed end 228
- shape of the taper may vary.
- Surface 222 a may taper linearly, or it may follow a somewhat uniform curve, such as a parabolic, or higher order, function.
- Outer circumferential surface 222 a may also be non-uniform as long as it generally tapers sufficiently to engage and force correspondingly configured collar pieces 212 a , 212 b together.
- collar pieces 212 a and 212 b be continuous. Portions of the collar pieces 212 a and 212 b may be removed to leave a number of smaller protrusions (not shown). Provided that sufficient portions of the collar 212 remain to engage, without significant deformation, the outer surface 222 a of screw void 216 , a substantially equivalent function as described above may be achieved.
- a plurality of posts may be provided (not shown), with at least one post on either side of slot 224 , and with each post positioned for sliding engagement with outer circumferential surface 222 a.
- walls 132 defining receptacle 120 may be made of a bendable material, and are preferably made of a resilient material. An appropriate plastic or metal, for example, may be used.
- the head 208 of bolt 200 may be graspable, having, for example, external grips, such as knurls (not shown), cross hatches (not shown), or ridges 238 , to provide greater friction to facilitate unassisted installation of bolt 200 .
- the head 208 is cylindrical, having a diameter of about 1.5 inches and a thickness of about 0.625 inches, or some other size and shape suitable for manual manipulation.
- the threaded end 204 protrudes substantially co-axially with the axis of the head 208 .
- a plurality ridges 238 each being substantially parallel to the axis of the threaded end 204 , may be located about the circumference of the cylindrical head 208 .
- Turning of the bolt 200 about its longitudinal axis may also be improved by using a non-circular or non-uniform shaped head (not shown) with the threaded end 204 preferably protruding from head 208 along an axis passing through a centroid of head 208 .
- Head 208 may be made of any rigid material, such as nylon, plastic or a metal. If constructed from a plastic, bolt 200 may be integrally moulded with head 208 . Referring to FIGS. 14A and 14B, provide an alternative connection between the threaded end 204 and head 208 , the threaded end 204 may be part of a bolt 240 having a bolt head 242 . To receive threaded end 204 , screw head 208 may be provided with a bore 243 therethrough which is coaxial with the rotational axis of the screw head 208 . A rebate 244 may be added to a side of the head 208 opposite to void 216 .
- Rebate 244 is centered about bore 243 , and is substantially the same shape but marginally smaller than bolt head 242 .
- Bolt 200 is assembled by inserting threaded end 204 into rebate 244 and through bore 243 . Because rebate 244 is marginally smaller than bolt head 242 , force must be applied to the bolt head 242 in the direction of the threaded end 204 , to press fit head 242 into rebate 244 .
- a bolt having a non-rotatable bolt head, such as a 1 ⁇ 4-20 hex bolt, is preferably used to increase rotational resistance between screw head 208 and bolt head 242 within rebate 244 .
- beam connection member 122 may be similar in configuration to beam connection member 116 , except that, in the illustrative embodiment, beam connection member 122 , may be configured to have an integral fuel source support base 92 for supporting a self contained fuel source, such as a propane tank 90 (shown in FIG. 1).
- a self contained fuel source such as a propane tank 90 (shown in FIG. 1).
- Other aspects of beam connection member 122 such as the beam securing apparatus 198 described above, are configured and operate in substantially the same manner as described for beam connection member 116 .
- the relative positioning of receptacle 124 and conduits 170 for securing beam connection member 122 to leg members 98 , 100 may require adjustment to accommodate base 92 .
- base 92 additionally performs a function analogous to strut 118 of beam connection member 116 in joining conduits 170 and having beam receptacle 124 defined therein.
- Beam connection member 122 is preferably moulded to have a fuel source support base 92 , which substantially conforms to the shape of at least a base rim 246 of a propane tank 90 .
- a standard domestic use “20 pound” propane tank such as part number G20-28 manufactured by Wolfdale Engineering Ltd. of Brampton, Ontario, may be used to determine the dimensions of support base 92 .
- Base rim 246 is received by a corresponding receptacle in the nature of a base rim cavity 248 defined in support base 92 . Because base rim cavity 248 conforms to the shape of base rim 246 , tipping or other movement of tank 90 is hindered by the support base 92 .
- a void 250 may be located in cavity 248 to save material and to provide drainage for the cavity 248 .
- Tipping may be further reduced by increasing the dimensions of support base 92 to conform to a greater portion of the tank 90 .
- support base 92 may have an abutment including portions defining a receptacle in the nature of a lower tank cavity 252 that conforms to a continuous portion of the lower part of tank 90 that is adjacent to base rim 246 .
- Tank cavity 252 does not need to encompass the entire circumference of tank 90 . While complete circumferential support may be used to further reduce possible movement of tank 90 , it may also make it more difficult to place tank 90 within base 92 .
- the portions of base 92 which define tank cavity 252 are preferably located adjacent beam receptacle 124 .
- Tank 90 may then be placed into base 92 by first approaching a side of base 92 opposite to receptacle 124 to avoid encountering cross beam 66 and the portions defining lower tank cavity 252 .
- Base 92 is preferably moulded from plastic but may moulded from metal as well.
- an alternative beam connection member 122 ′ which is similar in configuration to beam connection member 116 ′, may be used. As with beam connection member 122 , beam connection member 122 ′, may have an integral fuel source support base 92 ′.
- Beam connection member 122 ′ is formed as a strut 254 having a generally U-shaped cross-section, and may be attached between leg members, such as leg members 98 and 100 , or 98 ′ and 100 ′.
- the U-shaped cross-section has arms 256 and 258 which are joined by a base 260 (best seen in FIGS. 60C and 60D). Arm 256 and arm 258 of the U-shaped cross-section are preferably substantially at right angles to base 260 .
- Strut 254 is preferably attached between leg members 98 and 100 adjacent leg member base ends 110 and 112 .
- arms 256 and 258 When attached between leg members 98 and 100 , arms 256 and 258 may be generally parallel to the longitudinal axes of the leg members, and the U-shaped cross section preferably opens in the general direction of leg member base ends 110 and 112 .
- arm 258 may have an opening 262 formed therein for receiving beam end 128 ′. Opening 262 preferably is congruent to and substantially the same size as a lateral cross-section of beam end 128 ′. To facilitate placement of beam end 128 ′ into opening 262 , opening 262 may correspond to the general shape of just three sides of beam end 128 , to define a generally right-angled U-shaped opening 262 .
- Cross beam 66 ′ may be attached to strut 254 by first inserting beam end 128 ′ into opening 262 until beam end 128 ′ abuts arm 256 of strut 254 .
- Arm 256 of strut 254 may additionally have a supporting member attached thereto for supporting beam end 128 ′.
- the supporting member may be in the form of a substantially perpendicular flange 264 along a free edge 266 of arm 256 , flange 264 being generally directed towards opening 262 .
- Beam end 128 ′ may rest on flange 264 once beam end 128 ′ abuts arm 256 .
- one or more projections 267 may be added to base 260 or they may be stamped from the same material as base 260 , creating holes 269 , as shown in FIG. 60A.
- beam end 128 ′ is inhibited by arm 256 , flange 264 of arm 256 , base 260 of strut 254 , projections 267 and edges of opening 262 .
- Opening 262 may additionally have a flange such as a peripheral flange (not shown) for abutting cross beam 66 .
- base 260 of strut 254 may be widened at a mid-section 268 of strut 254 .
- Mid-section 268 may widened in a direction generally away from arm 256 or away from arm 258 , or in both directions. While strut 254 maintains its U-shaped cross-section in this configuration, arms 256 and 258 are closer to one another at the ends 270 of strut 254 and become gradually further apart to a maximum when adjacent mid-section 268 . If mid-section 268 is widened in a direction away from arm 258 only, beam connection member 122 ′ then projects from the plane of legs 98 and 100 in a similar direction as an attached shelf 70 .
- mid-section 268 is preferably sufficient to permit a base rim cavity 248 ′ for receiving at least a portion of a tank base rim 246 to be defined in mid-section 268 .
- mid-section 268 may be configured to permit a base rim cavity 248 ′ which receives a segment, for example half, of the base rim 246 of propane tank 90 .
- base rim cavity 248 ′ is defined to receive a segment of base rim 246
- the cavity 248 ′ is partially defined by an arcuate wall 272 having a similar radius to base rim 246 .
- Arcuate wall 272 may be curved in the general direction of opening 262 , or it may curve in some other direction, such as away from opening 262 .
- Beam end 128 ′ may be attached to strut 254 using at least one fastener, such as bolt 278 , which is inserted through a hole 280 in base 260 and a corresponding bore 282 in beam end 128 ′.
- Hole 280 is preferably located to pass through portions of base 260 defining base rim cavity 248 ′.
- hole 280 and bore 282 are preferably aligned to receive bolt 278 .
- bolt 278 Once bolt 278 is inserted therethrough, it may be manually secured with a wing nut 284 or some other manually tightenable fastener.
- hole 280 and bore 282 are aligned and preferably generally vertically oriented to permit insertion of bolt 278 in a downward direction. This arrangement permits bolt 278 to rest within hole 280 and bore 282 , while partially securing beam connection member 122 ′ to beam end 128 ′. Wing nut 284 may then be conveniently attached and tightened.
- FIGS. 48A, 48B and 51 in a manner similar to that described above for bolt 154 , rotational movement of bolt 278 may be inhibited by a portion 285 of bolt shaft 289 defining a non-round shape.
- Shaft portion 285 may be located adjacent bolt head 367 .
- At least hole 280 (shown in FIG. 9) may be configured to have substantially the same cross-sectional shape as defined by a periphery of shaft portion 285 to permit shaft portion 285 to be located therein. Because shaft portion 285 is non-round, and may be located within a similarly sized hole 280 , shaft 289 may be inhibited from rotating, for example, when nut 284 is threaded and tightened thereon. This may permit additional manual tightening of nut 284 to bolt 278 to further inhibit movement of connected beam end 128 ′ relative to beam connection member 122 ′.
- Nut 284 may be configured in a similar manner as described for nut 160 , and it may likewise co-operate with a corresponding rebate 291 , in a similar manner that nut 160 cooperates with rebate 169 to form a friction fit when nut 284 is threaded onto shaft 289 .
- FIG. 16 an alternative configuration for supporting a tank 90 is shown.
- a beam connection member 286 having substantially the same structure as beam connection member 116 ′′ is attached between legs 98 and 100 in a similar manner as described for connection member 116 ′′.
- Beam connection member 286 differs from connection member 116 ′′ in that it has an arcuate portion 288 having generally the same radius as tank 90 .
- tank 90 is supported by a strut 290 spanning legs 98 and 100 , a portion of curved tank body 292 (shown in FIG. 1) is received by arcuate portion 288 , and lateral movement of tank 90 in the direction of beam connection member 286 may be inhibited.
- strut 290 may have a base rim cavity 248 ′′ which conforms to and receives at least a portion of a tank base rim 246 , and preferably the full circumference of base rim 246 .
- tank support base 92 ′′ may be made from injection moulded plastic having a similar form as base 92 , or it may be made of wire as shown in FIG. 17.
- Tank support base 92 ′′ may also be pivotally attached to legs 98 , 100 . Pivotal attachment may be achieved using collinear posts 294 protruding from each leg member 98 and 100 .
- Posts 294 reside in aligned holes 296 located in support base 92 ′′. Aligned holes 296 are preferably generally located at either end of the longitudinal axis of base 92 ′′.
- posts 296 may be extensions of the wheel axle pins described below. Pivotal attachment of base 92 ′′ permits base 92 ′′ to be angled to receive tank base rim 246 . This may make it easier to place tank 90 into base 92 ′′. Once tank base rim 246 is placed within base 92 ′′, both base 92 ′′ and tank 90 may be rotated to a generally upright position. Movement of tank 90 may then be limited by beam connection member 286 and by adding a fuel source retainer, described below.
- Base 92 ′′ may also have a base rim collar 298 for receiving tank base rim 246 .
- base 92 ′′ may have one or more sections 300 (see FIG. 18) which conform to a portion of tank 90 to resist movement of tank 90 and to strengthen collar 298 .
- Sections 300 may be located adjacent posts 294 to limit movement of tank 90 in a direction along the pivotal axis of base 92 ′′.
- additional retention of tank 90 may be achieved by addition of a tank support 302 which extends from and substantially normal to base rim collar 298 , and is positioned to abut a side of tank 90 when tank 90 is placed in base 92 ′′.
- Tank wire 304 may have an arcuate portion 306 that substantially conforms to a portion of the circumference of tank 90 , such as tank body 292 , to provide lateral support to tank 90 in a direction generally opposite to the support provided by portions of tank cavity 252 adjacent beam receptacle 124 .
- Tank wire 304 may be attached to base 92 with two tank wire supports 308 formed at ends 310 of tank wire 304 .
- Tank wire supports 308 may be oriented substantially normal to the plane arcuate portion 306 and may be inserted in tank wire retaining holes 312 located adjacent to conduits 170 .
- an alternative fuel source retainer such as a collar 314 may be used to inhibit movement of tank 90 .
- Collar 314 has two substantially identical curved wire members 318 .
- Each wire member 318 has a curved portion 320 having a generally uniform radius which is preferably less than the radius of tank body 292 but greater than the radius of a standard valve protecting sleeve 316 attached to tank 90 .
- a mounting portion 322 is formed at an end of wire member 318 .
- Mounting portion 322 may be linear and substantially perpendicular to semi-circular portion 320 .
- the remaining end of wire member 318 may have a loop 324 defining a generally circular opening, the centroid of which is located on a line co-axial with a longitudinal axis of mounting portion 322 .
- a circular opening 326 is formed by the two semi-circular members 320 .
- Collar 314 may be attached to support member 64 so that the collar 314 spans, and is preferably centered, between legs 98 and 100 .
- Each mounting portion 322 may be attached to a respective leg member 98 , 100 using a mounting clip 328 wherein each mounting portion 322 is inserted into a respective mounting hole 330 in each mounting clip 328 for rotational movement therein.
- Each mounting clip 328 is attached to a leg member 98 or 100 for sliding movement along a longitudinal axis of the leg member.
- the mounting clips 328 are substantially identical to one another and may be mirror configurations of one another. The description of one mounting clip 328 therefore substantially applies to the other.
- Mounting clip 328 conforms to a portion of leg member 98 or 100 . If leg member 98 , 100 is has a round or oval lateral cross-section, then mounting clip 328 preferably encompasses greater than half of the circumference of a portion of the leg member so that the leg is retained by clip 328 . Similarly, if leg member 98 , 100 has a rectangular lateral cross-section then mounting clip 328 preferably encompasses at least two sides and at least part of both a third side and a fourth side of a portion of the leg member.
- Mounting clip 328 may be likewise configured to accommodate leg members having other cross sections. Mounting clip 328 preferably conforms to the attached leg member 98 , 100 to the extent that the clip 328 is held in place by friction at the interface between the mounting clip 328 and the leg member 98 , 100 . However, the friction is preferably not sufficient resist manual positioning of clip 328 by sliding it longitudinally along leg member 98 , 100 .
- mounting clips 328 of collar 314 may be slidingly moved along leg members 98 and 100 to a position adjacent shelf 70 . This positioning provides clearance for tank 90 to be placed within base 92 .
- mounting clips 328 of collar 314 are slidingly moved along legs 98 and 100 towards tank 90 , valve sleeve 316 passes through collar opening 326 , and curved members 320 may abut a shoulder portion 332 of tank 90 . Any lateral movement of tank 90 within base 92 causes collar 314 to come into contact with valve sleeve 316 thus inhibiting further lateral movement of tank 90 .
- one curved member 320 may be rotated toward and over valve sleeve 316 to permit removal of tank 90 .
- Mounting clips 328 may be attached to each leg member 98 , 100 by simultaneously manually applying generally opposite forces to the ends 334 and 336 of clip 328 to increase the linear distance between them. This permits passage of a leg member 98 or 100 . Since mounting clips 328 are preferably made of a generally resilient material, such as a plastic, when a force is no longer applied, the ends 334 and 336 return to their initial position to retain a portion of the leg member therein. The respective mounting portions 322 of each curved wire member 318 may then be inserted into the respective mounting holes 330 .
- At least the curved wire member 318 is sufficiently resilient to permit mounting ends 322 to be moved axially closer to one another as they are aligned with their respective mounting holes 330 . Once aligned, the resilient curved portions 320 encourage the respective mounting members 322 to enter the mounting holes 330 .
- Curved portions 320 of collar 314 may alternatively have radii marginally larger than the radius of tank body 292 . In this configuration (not shown) curved portions 320 are aligned with body 292 and combine to surround tank body 292 to inhibit lateral movement thereof.
- a yet further alternative fuel source retainer such as a collar 314 ′ may be used to inhibit movement of tank 90 .
- Collar 314 ′ may include a single piece of wire having a curved, and preferably semi-circular, portion 320 ′ formed therein to define two mounting portions 322 ′.
- the configuration of both curved portion 320 ′ and mounting portions 322 ′ is substantially the same as described for curved wire member 318 and mounting portion 322 of the embodiment described above.
- Collar 314 ′ is attached to mounting clips 328 , and permits the installation, retention and removal of a tank 90 in a similar manner as described above for collar 314 .
- curved portion 320 ′′ may be additionally configured to capture an edge of valve protecting sleeve 316 .
- curved portion 320 ′′ may have a clip 338 formed therein for engaging a portion of sleeve 316 .
- the radius of curved portion 320 ′′ is preferably substantially the same as sleeve 316 so that clip 338 may be aligned with sleeve 316 .
- mounting clips 328 may be eliminated and the mounting portions of the various embodiments, for example mounting portions 322 , may be inserted directly into mounting holes located in each leg member 98 and 100 for rotational movement therein.
- retainer 341 may depend from bridging member 104 and engage valve protecting sleeve 316 to inhibit movement of tank 90 when placed on a support such as beam connection member 122 ′, having base rim cavity 248 ′.
- Retainer 341 may be used in conjunction with other supports such as fuel source support base 92 .
- retainer 341 will be described in the context of a tank 90 supported by beam connection member 122 ′.
- retainer 341 includes a mounting member in the nature of mounting bracket 343 and an engaging member 345 .
- Mounting bracket 343 and engaging member 345 abut opposite sides of tank collar 316 to inhibit movement of collar 316 and, by connection, tank 90 .
- Bracket 343 may be secured at an end to another component of barbeque 60 so that movement of bracket 343 is minimized.
- bracket 343 may be attached to bridging member 104 . If bracket 343 is attached to bridging member 104 it may be welded or otherwise connected to a flange 602 thereof. While bracket 343 may be attached to a side of flange 602 , it may also be attached to an edge of flange 602 .
- bracket 343 may be generally L-shaped, having a first arm 347 for attachment to flange 602 and a second arm 349 which, when installed, projects away from bridging member 104 so that it may abut tank collar 316 when tank 90 is placed in base rim cavity 248 ′.
- One or more protrusions in the nature of longitudinal flanges 335 and 337 may be added to or integrally formed in bracket 343 .
- Flanges 335 and 337 are preferably angled from bracket 343 so that they are positioned to contact tank collar 316 . This configuration encourages at least two points of contact between bracket 343 and tank collar 316 .
- bracket 343 could have a generally arcuate shape (not shown) to conform to arcuate tank collar 316 .
- bracket 343 is preferably constructed of a substantially rigid material such as a metal, and may additionally be strengthened by forming a longitudinal indent 351 therein.
- engaging member 345 co-operates with bracket 343 to engage and retain tank collar 316 therebetween.
- Engaging member 345 includes at least one slot 353 , and preferably a pair of slots 353 , which receive edges 355 of an opening 357 in bracket 343 .
- Opening 357 may be oriented generally co-axially with a longitudinal axis of second arm 349 , with edges 355 running generally parallel to the longitudinal axis.
- Slots 353 are preferably parallel to one another, and may slidingly engage edges 355 to permit movement of engaging member 345 along edges 355 from an engaged position (see FIGS.
- Slots 353 may define in engaging member 345 a head portion 361 and a body portion 363 , having a stem 365 therebetween.
- body 363 may be curved to correspond to the curvature of collar 316 .
- Head 361 preferably has a shape that is generally similar to, but smaller than, that of opening 357 , and slots 353 run generally transverse to a longitudinal axis of head 361 . This configuration permits head 361 to be inserted into opening 357 .
- slots 353 preferably have a width that is at least the same as the combined thickness of mounting bracket 343 and tank collar 316 .
- FIGS. 47G and 47H show engaging member 345 with an elongated shim 373 ′ which may further reduce play in engaging member 345 .
- Engaging member 345 may additionally be provided with a protrusion in the nature of a tab 359 for grasping and moving engaging member 345 between engaged and disengaged positions.
- Tab 359 preferably projects from a side of body 363 , and may have a generally arcuate shape to facilitate grasping and moving of body 363 by hand.
- Engaging member 345 is preferably moulded from a plastic, and may include a hole 375 to encourage cooling during the moulding process.
- tank 90 is first placed onto beam connection member 122 ′, but held with collar 316 tilted away from fuel source retainer 341 .
- Engaging member 345 may then be moved to a disengaged position to permit placement of collar 316 adjacent or abutting mounting bracket 343 .
- engaging member 345 may be slid into an engaged position by grasping tab 359 and moving the engaging member 345 to retain collar 316 .
- movement of tank 90 may be further inhibited by using bolt 278 as a fuel tank retaining bolt to retain tank rim 246 within cavity 248 ′.
- a head 367 of bolt 278 may be located adjacent arcuate wall 272 with substantially the thickness of tank rim 246 therebetween.
- lateral movement of tank rim 246 when placed between head 367 and arcuate wall 272 may be inhibited by arcuate wall 272 and bolt head 367 .
- bolt head 367 is tapered, being narrower at its free end 369 , a generally V-shaped opening 371 is formed between head 367 and arcuate wall 272 .
- tank rim 246 As tank rim 246 is placed between head 367 and arcuate wall 272 , it may be guided into position by the narrowing V-shape.
- barbeque 60 may have a shelf 68 or two shelves (second shelf not shown) to provide a surface 339 which may be used for food preparation, or for supporting items such as cooking utensils.
- Shelves 68 may be configured identically, or configured as a mirror image of one another.
- the second shelf has a configuration that mirrors shelf 68 .
- the description of shelf 68 that follows therefore substantially applies to the second shelf, as well.
- Shelf 68 includes a body 333 having a generally planar surface 339 .
- Body 333 may be supported by at least one arm in the nature of a shelf supporting portion 340 .
- Shelf supporting portion 340 may be formed from leg member 98
- a second shelf supporting portion 342 may be formed from leg member 100 .
- Legs 98 , 100 are preferably each bent in a similar manner to form a substantially 90 degree angle therein, creating supporting portions 340 , 342 of sufficient length to support shelf 68 .
- each supporting portion 340 , 342 is approximately 15.5 inches long, oriented in substantially the same direction, and generally parallel to the another.
- Shelf 68 may be secured to each of the supporting portions 340 , 342 of respective leg members 98 , 100 by shelf retainers 344 and 346 having receptacles 348 and 350 , which receptacles each receive a respective free end 352 and 354 of supporting portions 340 and 342 . At least free ends 352 and 354 may be frictionally retained within shelf retainers 344 and 346 .
- Each receptacle 348 and 202 may be attached to, or integral with, shelf 68 .
- receptacles 348 , 350 are integral with shelf 68 . Because shelf retainers 344 and 346 are substantially similar to one another, only shelf retainer 344 , which attaches supporting portion 340 to shelf 68 , will be described.
- Receptacle 348 preferably has a cross-section which, when taken lateral to direction of insertion D, is substantially equal to or larger than the size and shape of the lateral cross-section of supporting portion 340 .
- the relatively larger cross-section permits supporting portion 340 to be inserted into the receptacle 348 . If the cross-section of the receptacle 348 and corresponding supporting portion 340 is substantially the same size, then a friction fit may be formed between receptacle 348 and corresponding supporting portion 340 . While generally maintaining its lateral cross-sectional shape and size, receptacle 348 may also be elongated to receive a greater portion of free end 352 .
- receptacle 348 may be provided with a shelf retainer such as a protrusion in the shape of a ramp 356 located within receptacle 348 .
- Ramp 356 generally increases along the direction of insertion D.
- a corresponding hole or void 358 located in supporting portion 340 , receives ramp 356 to inhibit movement of shelf 68 relative to supporting portion 340 .
- Ramp 356 is installed as follows. When inserting free end 352 into receptacle 348 , free end 352 encounters a base 360 of a sloping side 362 of ramp 356 .
- Ramp 356 is preferably made of a resilient material such as a plastic to permit it to deform before entering void 358 . As free end 352 is forced along ramp 356 , ramp 356 deforms to permit passage of free end 352 into receptacle 348 . When void 358 of supporting portion 340 is positioned to correspond with the location of ramp 356 , resilient ramp 356 extends therein. Removal of free end 352 in an opposite direction is inhibited by a sheer side 364 of ramp 356 which abuts an edge of void 358 . Further insertion of free end 352 into receptacle 348 is prevented by a stop such as tab 366 attached to shelf 68 .
- a stop such as tab 366 attached to shelf 68 .
- receptacle 348 may have a closed end (not shown) for preventing further insertion of free end 352 .
- the stop provides feedback that the free end 352 is fully inserted and assembly of the two parts is complete.
- Shelf retainer 344 may additionally have a conduit 368 , which is similar in configuration to receptacle 348 and has an axis which is collinear to the axis of receptacle 348 .
- Conduit 368 differs from receptacle 348 in at least that it does not have a stop, such as tab 366 . This permits free end 352 to be inserted through conduit 368 in the general direction of insertion D so that it may be subsequently inserted into receptacle 348 .
- Conduit 368 thus generally guides free end 352 toward receptacle 348 . Once free end 352 is received by receptacle 348 , conduit 368 inhibits the movement of supporting portion 340 relative to shelf 68 .
- Conduit 368 may be attached to, or be formed integrally with (for example, by moulding), shelf 68 .
- conduit 368 may have a slot which separates conduit 368 into two conduit portions 368 a and 368 b .
- Conduit portions 368 a and 368 b are preferably the same size but may be unequal.
- the conduit portions 368 a and 368 b may have greater flexibility at their free ends to facilitate insertion of free end 352 and passage of supporting portion 340 .
- conduit 368 alternatively may be generally J-shaped. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 55A, conduit 368 may be displaced from receptacle 348 by a greater distance than is shown in FIG. 22. This increased spacing may provide greater resistance to a release of an attached leg member 98 from conduit 368 when shelf 68 is in an operative position and a generally downward force is applied to a free end 377 of shelf 68 . Alternatively, to provide a greater area of contact for retention of supporting portion 340 , conduit 368 may be lengthened to meet receptacle 348 to form a single continuous passage (not shown).
- Shelf 68 could alternatively be attached to supporting portions 340 and 342 by bolting, welding, or some other attachment means. While shelf supporting portions 340 and 342 are integral with legs 98 and 100 in the illustrative embodiment, they may alternatively be made of a separate member or members attached to support member 62 .
- shelf 68 is made of moulded plastic but could be made from some other material such as steel. If shelf 68 is made of plastic, then strengthening ribs 220 may be added to increase the rigidity of shelf 68 , potentially reducing the amount of material required to mould shelf 68 .
- shelf 68 in an alternative embodiment of shelf 68 , labelled 68 ′, either a portion or the entirety of shelf surface 339 ′ may be manually removable.
- This removable portion, or member, 370 may be removed to be used as a tray, to be cleaned, for example in a dishwasher, or it may be put to some other use appropriate for such a member having a substantially flat an rigid surface.
- a suitable weather resistant material such as plastic, porcelain, steel, ceramic, wood or a combination thereof may be used to construct removable member 370 .
- Removable member 370 may also have a ridge (not shown) about the perimeter of its surface 339 ′, and a drain (not shown) to permit removal of a liquid such as rain water by gravity.
- shelf 68 ′ may have a generally U-shaped shelf frame 372 .
- An inner perimeter 374 of shelf frame 372 substantially conforms to a portion of the periphery of removable member to preferably form a friction fit therebetween.
- Removable member 370 may alternatively or additionally be fastened to frame 372 with a fastener (not shown), or held in place by gravity. While frame 372 may define a closed opening, for example a four-sided opening, the partial removal of a portion of frame 372 , such as a fourth side of a rectangular frame, permits an edge 376 of removable member 370 to be grasped for removal and installation.
- removable member 370 may be inhibited by tabs 378 and 380 projecting generally toward each other from respective free ends 382 and 384 of arms 386 and 388 of U-shaped frame 372 .
- Tabs 378 and 380 further encourage a friction fit between frame 372 and removable member 370 .
- the periphery of removable member 370 may be bevelled or provided with a rib (not shown) for engagement with a corresponding feature of the frame 372 to permit a snap fit therebetween.
- Other variations to the configuration of the interface between frame 372 and removable member 370 may be defined to retain member 370 within frame 372 while permitting unassisted installation and removal of member 370 therein.
- Removable member 370 may be any generally planar shape suitable for use as a tray as long as frame 372 is configured to receive that particular shape.
- Receptacle 350 ′ and conduit 368 ′ may be configured as described for the illustrative embodiment, or they may be formed together as a continuous channel member 392 ′ for slidingly receiving and frictionally retaining supporting portion 340 of leg member 98 .
- a second continuous channel member 394 ′ having a substantially similar configuration as channel member 392 ′, is provided for retaining supporting portion 342 of leg member 100 . Because channel members 392 ′ and 394 ′ are similar, a description of channel member 394 ′ will be provided. This description applies equally to channel member 392 ′ with necessary modifications for receiving supporting portion 340 .
- Channel member 394 ′ may be attached to arm 388 of U-shaped shelf frame 372 along a closed side 396 of the channel member 394 ′.
- Channel member 394 ′ may alternatively be integrally formed with shelf frame 372 .
- a ramp 356 ′ which has a configuration that is similar to ramp 356 and which operates in a similar manner, is provided along an interior surface 398 of conduit 390 ′ for entering void 358 to retain supporting portion 342 .
- the procedure required to manually attach shelf frame 372 to supporting portions 340 and 342 is similar to that described above for attaching shelf 68 to supporting portions 340 and 342 .
- channel member 392 ′ performs a similar function to that of conduits 368 , 390 and receptacles 348 , 350 .
- Bends 400 and 402 of U-shaped frame 372 may be used as stops to prevent further insertion of supporting portions 340 , 342 instead of a tab such as tab 366 , or closing an end of channel member 392 ′.
- Channel member 392 ′ may have a generally circular or rectangular cross-section for frictionally receiving and retaining supporting portions having a variety of cross-sections. For example, if channel member 392 ′ has a generally rectangular cross-section, it may receive and retain supporting members having cross-sections of a similar size and shape. An advantage of some cross-sectional shapes is that they may accommodate supporting members having different cross-sections as long as there is sufficient frictional contact between the supporting members and the inner surface of the channel. A channel having a generally square cross-section, for example, may also receive and retain a supporting member having a circular cross-section with a diameter that is substantially the same magnitude as the length of the sides of the channel's square cross-section.
- the circular supporting member contacts the inner surface of the conduit along lines defining the mid-points of the channel's sides, and is retained by the channel.
- ramp 356 ′ serves to further retain the support member within the channel.
- shelf 68 in a yet further alternative embodiment of shelf 68 , labelled 68 ′′, a fastener in the nature of at least two bolts 404 and wing nuts 406 may be used to attach shelf 68 ′′ to supporting portions 340 and 342 .
- Shelf 68 ′′ has at least one slat 408 for spanning the distance between supporting portions 340 and 342 .
- Slats 408 may be bolted directly to supporting portions 340 and 342 using bolts 404 inserted through slat holes 410 and through holes 412 in supporting portions 340 and 342 , which bolts 404 are secured by wing nuts 406 .
- Slats 408 may also be retained by a shelf bracket 414 at each slat end 416 .
- Each shelf bracket 414 is substantially identical to the other. The description of one therefore applies to the other.
- Shelf bracket 414 retains and secures slat ends 416 to a supporting portion, such as supporting portion 340 .
- the shelf bracket 414 has a narrow body with a longitudinal bend 418 therein to form to arms 420 and 422 extending from bend 418 substantially normal to one another.
- One of the arms, such as arm 420 may have protrusions, such as flanges 424 to inhibit lateral movement of slat ends 416 .
- Flanges 424 may be generally normal to both arms 420 and 422 , and may be located at least at either end of bracket 414 .
- Movement of slats 408 may also be inhibited by additional protrusions (not shown) extending from either arm 420 or arm 422 , which additional protrusions are located to abut slats 408 that are not adjacent the ends of bracket 414 . These additional protrusions may also be used to evenly space slats 408 from one another.
- the other arm, arm 422 has at least one, and preferably two holes 426 , there through for receiving a bolt 404 .
- Shelf 68 ′′ may be installed by placing slats 408 on support portions 340 ′ and 342 ′ so that each end 416 of each slat 408 is supported by one of support portions 340 ′ and 342 ′.
- Each bracket 414 is placed over the slat ends 416 with slat ends 416 located between flanges 424 .
- Holes 426 of arm 422 are then aligned with both the hole 410 in the adjacent slat 408 and hole 412 in the associated support portion 340 or 198 .
- Bolt 404 may then be inserted through the three holes 426 , 410 and 412 and manually secured with a wing nut 406 .
- Lifting or otherwise moving barbeque 60 may be facilitated by providing a handle hole 428 (shown in FIG. 22) defined in shelf 68 for gripping shelf 68 .
- Shelf 68 may also have an indentation defining a cup holder 430 .
- at least one utensil rebate 432 for holding utensils (not shown) may be provided along an edge of shelf 68 .
- a handle hole (not shown), cup holder (not shown) and utensil rebate (labelled 432 ′ on shelf 68 ′ and 432 ′′ on shelf 68 ′) may also be added to shelves 68 ′ or 68 ′′.
- one or both of the shelves may be substituted with a side burner 434 .
- Side burner 434 may have a burner frame member 436 which has substantially the same configuration as shelf frame 372 , and a burner apparatus 438 which may include a burner tray 440 having a similar configuration to removable member 370 .
- Burner tray 440 may also be installed and retained within burner frame 436 in a manner similar to that described for removable member 370 .
- burner frame 436 may be installed and retained in substantially the same manner as described for shelf frame 372 .
- burner frame member 436 is generally L-shaped having just one arm 386 ′ which has a configuration similar to arm 386 of shelf frame 372 .
- burner frame 436 has a flange 444 for receiving a fastener such as bolt 446 for fastening burner frame 436 to burner tray 440 .
- At least one fastener in the nature a bolt 442 may be inserted through a hole such as hole 443 in channel member 392 ′ and into an aligned threaded bore 445 in burner tray 440 .
- flange 444 may also be used for fastening burner frame 436 to burner tray 440 .
- the combined burner tray 440 and frame 436 may then be attached to shelf supporting portion 340 in the manner described above, namely by inserting shelf supporting portion 340 into channel member 392 ′.
- a head 447 of bolt 442 may protrude into the channel defined by channel member 392 ′, it is preferably located or otherwise configured to clear supporting portion 340 .
- a projection in the nature of a stop 449 may be located adjacent channel member 392 ′ to inhibit further insertion of supporting portion 340 therein.
- Burner tray 440 has a burner pan 448 in which a standard burner, such as burner 450 may reside.
- a standard burner such as burner 450 may reside.
- Burner pan 448 may be formed from the same piece of material as burner tray 440 to form one integral piece.
- burner pan 448 and tray 440 may be stamped from a single piece of sheet metal.
- FIG. 29 a variation of burner pan 448 , labelled 448 ′, is illustrated.
- Burner pan 448 ′ may be manufactured as a separate part that rests within a burner pan opening (not shown) and that is supported by a peripheral flange 452 .
- burner tray 440 may additionally include an abutting member in the nature of a burner tray bracket 453 for attaching tray 440 to a leg member, such as cylindrical leg member 100 (attachment to leg shelf supporting portion 342 is shown in FIG. 55).
- Burner tray bracket 453 abuts shelf supporting portion 342 to inhibit movement of burner tray 440 relative to supporting portion 342 .
- Burner tray bracket 453 may be integrally formed with burner tray 440 , and may project from tray 440 to abut shelf supporting portion 342 . While bracket 453 may tangentially abut cylindrical shelf supporting portion 342 , if a shelf supporting portion having a non-rounded profile is employed, such as shelf supporting portion 342 ′, then bracket 453 may abut the supporting portion substantially flush, along a corresponding surface thereof (not shown).
- a fastener including a nut and bolt, or a bolt having a serrated neck (not shown) which is similar to bolt 612 ′′, may be used to connect burner tray bracket 453 to shelf supporting portion 342 .
- the bolt may be inserted through a hole 455 in bracket 453 , and into a corresponding pair of aligned holes 457 and 459 , located in shelf supporting portion 342 . Once inserted, the bolt may be secured by a manually tightenable retainer, such as a wing nut.
- shelf supporting portion 342 ′ If a shelf supporting portion having a non-rounded profile is employed, such as shelf supporting portion 342 ′, then the fastener may be inserted through a hole 463 in bracket 453 , and a corresponding hole in supporting portion 342 ′, which is located to align with hole 463 (not shown).
- Burner tray bracket 453 may include an additional member, in the nature of an angled flange 461 , which may be configured to tangentially abut shelf supporting portion 342 to further inhibit movement of burner tray 436 . Even if bracket 453 is not attached to supporting portion 342 using a fastener, flange 461 serves to inhibit removal of tray 448 from supporting portion 342 in at least a direction generally transverse to the plane of tray 448 .
- burner 450 has a burner element 454 that is attached to a fuel conduit 456 .
- Burner element 454 may have a fastener in the nature of a threaded post 458 attached thereto. Threaded post 458 may be inserted through a post hole 460 in burner pan 448 and manually secured using a wing nut 462 or some other manually tightenable fastener.
- Fuel conduit 456 extends through a conduit hole 464 in pan 448 and may receive in its input end 466 a fuel output conduit 468 of a burner valve 470 .
- Conduit hole 464 is preferably smaller than element 454 to inhibit passage of element 454 therethrough.
- conduit 456 Proper placement of conduit 456 within conduit hole 464 may be facilitated both by threaded post 458 and post hole 460 , and by an arcuate rebate 472 at an edge of conduit hole 464 which may abut conduit 456 .
- Arcuate rebate 472 preferably conforms to a portion of fuel conduit 456 and may have substantially the same radius of conduit 456 .
- An optional spider guard 474 may be included at input end 466 to inhibit entry of spiders and other insects therein.
- a burner grill 476 may be located adjacent burner element 454 , and is preferably located to receive heat from burner 450 when burner 450 is operational.
- Burner grill 476 may have a protrusion such as a leg 478 to inhibit movement of burner grill 476 relative to burner tray 440 .
- burner grill 476 has four legs 478 which may be received by four leg holes 480 in burner tray 440 . When legs 478 are inserted into leg holes 480 , lateral movement of burner grill 476 is limited. At least one, and preferably two, of burner legs 478 have a curved end 482 . Curved ends 482 are first inserted into respective leg holes 480 with burner grill 476 oriented substantially perpendicular to burner tray 440 .
- burner grill 476 may be rotated about curved ends 482 , which reside in leg holes 480 , to a position generally parallel to burner tray 440 .
- the remaining legs 478 may then be inserted into leg holes 480 in the manner described above. In this configuration movement of burner grill relative to burner tray 440 may be further inhibited.
- Burner valve 470 may be inserted into valve opening 484 from a side of burner tray opposite to that of burner pan 448 , and may be attached to burner tray 440 with a valve mounting apparatus, such as valve clip 486 .
- Valve opening 484 may be generally circular and may have one or more engaging members in the nature of fins 488 which extend into valve opening 484 .
- Fins 488 are preferably identical in shape and are located in a plane parallel to that of burner tray 440 .
- Each fin 488 extends from an opposite side of valve opening 484 towards the other, and has a curved portion 490 which abuts and is connected to a corresponding portion of a wall 492 of valve opening 484 .
- a free end 494 of each fin 488 is substantially linear and defines a generally straight edge 496 . Free ends 494 may be parallel to each other.
- valve clip 486 includes a body 487 which may have a planar portion having curved ends 500 and generally linear parallel sides 502 which together define a shape which is substantially the same as valve clip opening 484 defined in part by fins 488 .
- Planar portion 498 also has an opening, such as valve stem opening 504 , passing therethrough.
- Valve stem opening 504 permits insertion of a valve stem 506 of burner valve 470 .
- Valve clip 486 may be attached to a standard burner valve, such as burner valve 470 , which is manufactured by Lincoln Brass Works of Waynesboro, Tenn. Because valve clip 486 is preferably attached to burner valve 470 by a manufacturer, it may be fastened to burner valve 470 using screws 508 inserted through bores 509 of valve clip 486 . Manually tightenable fasteners may also be used (not shown). The bores may additionally pass through posts 510 of valve clip 486 . Posts 510 are preferably of a length to ensure that valve stem projects through valve stem opening 504 a sufficient distance to engage a valve knob 512 once burner valve 470 is attached to burner tray 440 . Valve knob 512 facilitates turning of valve post 506 about its axis to control fuel flow through burner valve 470 .
- a standard burner valve such as burner valve 470 , which is manufactured by Lincoln Brass Works of Waynesboro, Tenn. Because valve clip 486 is preferably attached to burner valve 470 by a manufacturer, it may be fastened to burner valve
- valve clip 486 may be inserted through valve clip opening 484 , as shown progressively in FIGS. 30A and 30B. Further insertion of valve clip 486 may be inhibited by at least one, and preferably two, tabs 514 , wherein each tab 514 extends from a linear edge 502 of valve clip 486 . Tabs 514 may lie in a plane parallel to, but displaced from, the plane of the surface 516 planar member 498 .
- valve clip 486 Once valve clip 486 is inserted into valve clip opening 484 to the point that it is inhibited from further insertion by tabs 514 , it may be rotated about its central axis by preferably 90 degrees (as shown in FIG. 30C). This rotation aligns the curved portions 490 of fins 488 and the curved ends 500 of valve clip 486 to inhibit removal of valve clip 486 from valve clip opening 484 .
- Valve clip 486 may be additionally configured to retain fins 488 .
- Curved ends 500 of planar member 498 may be provided with a slot 518 which bisects the curved ends 500 to form two parallel wings or curved ends 500 a and 500 b for retaining fins 488 .
- planar member 498 is installed by insertion into valve clip opening 496 , as shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B.
- Tabs 514 extend from each linear side 502 b to permit only curved end 500 a to pass through valve clip opening 484 . In this position, slots 518 are aligned with straight edges 496 of fins 488 .
- valve clip 486 Rotation of valve clip 486 by 90 degrees causes edges 496 of fins 488 to enter respective slots 518 . Once fins 488 enter slots 518 , curved ends 500 a and 500 b retain respective fins 488 therebetween (as shown in FIG. 30C). If one or both slots 518 is narrowed to substantially the same thickness as fins 488 , fins 488 may be frictionally retained therein.
- tabs 514 which are preferably coplanar with linear sides 502 b , may be provided with a retainer such as a protrusion in the shape of a ramp 520 .
- Ramp 520 generally increases opposite to the direction of rotation R and projects into the plane of slot 518 .
- ramps 520 abut fins 488 .
- tabs 514 deflect away from the plane of slot 518 . This deflection permits rotation of valve clip 486 and fins 488 may enter slot 518 .
- valve clip 486 is rotated 90 degrees, tabs 514 , and ramps 520 , enter valve clip opening 484 to clear fins 488 and return to their original position, as is best shown in FIG. 30C. Further rotation of valve clip 486 is inhibited by sheer side 522 of each ramp 520 which abuts straight edge 496 of fin 488 . This inhibited rotation provides feedback that valve clip 486 is installed.
- Tabs 514 are preferably made of a resilient material such as a plastic to enable them to resiliently return to their initial positions after being deflected during installation. The thickness of each tab 514 may be reduced to facilitate temporary deflection of tab 514 from its initial position.
- burner knob 524 may be attached to valve stem 506 , and conduit 456 may be oriented to cause valve output 468 to be inserted into conduit input end 466 .
- Valve clip 486 may be removed by manually deflecting tabs 514 , for example by finger pressure, and concurrently rotating valve clip 486 in a direction opposite to direction D.
- an apex 526 (shown in phantom in FIG. 30C) of slot 518 which is co-planar with slot 518 , has a curved portion 528 and a tangent portion 530 .
- tangent portion 530 abuts fin straight edge 496 to inhibit transverse movement of valve 470 relative to fin straight edge 496 .
- Tangent portion 530 originates at a linear edge 502 of valve clip 486 and merges with curved portion 528 which gradually curves toward valve stem opening 504 and terminates at an opposite linear edge 502 of valve clip 486 adjacent tab 514 .
- curved portion 528 When valve clip 486 is installed, curved portion 528 first meets fin straight edge 496 , and as valve clip 486 is rotated, curved portion 528 guides tangent portion 530 into alignment with fin linear edge 496 . Once tangent portion 530 and linear edge 496 are aligned, ramped tabs 514 clear fin 488 and snap into place. To further facilitate alignment of fin 488 with slot 518 , curved edges 500 a and 500 b may be rounded in a direction generally normal to the plane of the curves of curved edges 500 a and 500 b.
- Valve clip 486 may be made of any preferably weather resistant material such as a plastic or a metal.
- valve clip 486 is injection moulded as a single piece using a plastic that enables tabs 514 to be resilient.
- a side burner 434 ′ is configured for use with shelf bracket 414 .
- the configuration and installation of valve clip 486 and the other elements of side burner 434 is substantially the same as described above for side burner 434 , and are not described further.
- One shelf bracket 414 may be used to secure burner tray 440 .
- Shelf bracket 414 is installed in substantially the same manner as described above in the context of shelves 68 ′′ and 70 ′′.
- Bolts 404 are inserted into bracket holes 426 , through holes 532 in burner tray 440 , and then through holes 412 in support portion 340 ′ or 342 ′ (side burner 434 ′ may also be attached to support portions 340 and 342 in a similar manner).
- Bolts 404 may then be secured with wing nuts 406 .
- Burner tray 440 may be attached to the remaining support portion 340 ′ or 198 ′ with at least one bolt 404 inserted through holes 532 in tray 440 and holes 406 in the support member.
- Bolts 404 may then be secured with wing nuts 406 .
- a cross piece in the nature of a generally rectangular panel 72 , is mounted between support members 62 and 64 , and is preferably mounted between a leg member 98 or 100 of support member 62 and a leg member 98 or 100 of support member 64 .
- the generally planar panel 72 substantially conforms to the shape of opening 534 (see FIG. 32) which is generally defined by the support members 62 and 64 , cross beam 66 and console 86 .
- Panel 72 may also be curved or bowed, or some other shape that substantially spans opening 534 , and may have a flange or other protrusion (not shown) to at least partially obscure an adjacent leg member 98 or 100 .
- Panel 72 is preferably mounted to be substantially parallel to cross beam 66 .
- a pocket 536 may be integrally formed in panel 72 .
- Pocket 536 may be used for holding condiments or utensils (not shown).
- Pocket 536 may have a bottom 538 which projects from panel 72 .
- Sides of pocket 536 may be defined by a portion of panel 72 and at least one wall 540 which traverses bottom 538 . Additional walls such as wall 541 may be added to define a four-sided pocket 538 having a bottom 538 .
- pocket 536 extends along substantially the entire length of panel 72 .
- at least one of pocket sides 540 , 541 may be angled inwards, for example by three degrees relative to pocket bottom 538 .
- pocket 536 may be facilitated by tilting pocket 536 away from the plane of panel 72 , for example by 12 degrees.
- the location of pocket 536 may be varied relative to longitudinal edges 542 and 544 of panel 72 .
- pocket 536 ′ may be located adjacent longitudinal edge 544 ′ of an alternative panel 72 ′, described below.
- Panel 72 has at least one mounting member, and preferably two retaining or mounting members, in the nature of mounting posts or pins 546 , each of which extends from an edge thereof.
- Each pin 546 extends from an edge 548 of panel 72 that is substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of pocket 536 .
- Pins 546 may be coaxial and are oriented for insertion into corresponding mounting holes 550 located in support members 62 and 64 , and each pin 546 may rest, and may additionally be frictionally retained, therein.
- Mounting holes 550 are preferably located in one of legs 98 or 100 of each support member 62 , 64 .
- each pin 546 projects from an edge of panel 72 , adjacent a corner thereof, and each corresponding mounting hole 550 is located adjacent a respective bridging member 102 and 104 . Pins 546 may also lie in substantially the same plane as panel 72 .
- Panel 72 may have an additional mounting member in the nature of a retaining clip 552 .
- Retaining clip 552 may be located along edge 548 of panel 72 , and located at a distance, for example ten inches, from pin 546 . Additional retaining clips 552 may be added.
- Each retaining clip 552 is preferably located to correspond to the location of a leg member 98 , 100 when the panel 72 is installed.
- Retaining clip 552 may be made of a resilient material, and may have a shape that conforms to a portion, and preferably at least a semi-circular half, of the lateral perimeter of a corresponding leg member 98 , 100 .
- clips 552 may have a semi-circular surface 554 corresponding to the shape of leg member 98 , 100 .
- Retaining clip 552 is attached to, or integrally formed with, panel 72 at a mid-point of the curved retaining clip 552 .
- each clip 552 receives and retains a portion of a respective leg member 98 or 100 , and limits movement of panel 72 in a direction substantially transverse to the plane of panel 72 . If a leg member, such as leg 98 ′, having a non-round cross-section is used, then retaining clip 552 may be configured accordingly.
- each clip 552 may be attached to panel 72 at an end 556 of clip 552 instead of a mid-section (not shown).
- surface 554 of clip 552 is preferably configured to conform to a greater portion of the circumference of leg member 98 , 100 than in the embodiment described above. This permits a snap fit to be formed after resilient clip 552 is attached to a leg member 98 , 100 .
- a resilient free end of clip 552 must be forced away from panel 72 to accommodate the wider diameter of leg member 98 , 100 .
- leg member 98 , 100 Once leg member 98 , 100 is placed within clip 552 the free end resiliently returns to its initial position to engage a portion of leg member 98 , 100 substantially corresponding to the shape of clip surface 554 .
- the illustrative embodiment of clip 552 may be likewise configured to form a snap fit with leg member 98 , 100 by extending free ends 556 to encompass a greater portion of the lateral perimeter of legs 98 , 100 .
- the mounting members including pins 546 and clips 552 , substantially secure panel 72 between support members 62 and 64 to provide at least some resistance to movement of support members 62 and 64 relative to one another.
- Pins 546 and clips 552 are both preferably integrally formed with panel 72 , which may be made of a plastic or metal.
- alternative panel 72 ′ has a general configuration similar to that of panel 72 .
- Panel 72 ′ differs in that it may be disassembled permitting it to fit within a smaller volume than in its assembled state for storage or shipping.
- Panel 72 ′ may be generally planar, and may be mounted to legs 98 ′, between support members 62 ′ and 64 ′, using panel mounting brackets 557 .
- Brackets 557 may be identical, but are preferably mirror images of one another. Accordingly, the description of one bracket 557 applies to the other.
- Bracket 557 has a mounting pin 546 ′, which is configured and operates in a similar manner as described for mounting pin 546 , for mounting the bracket 557 to leg member 98 ′.
- a clip 552 ′ which is configured and operates in a similar manner as described for clip 552 , may be added to one or both brackets 557 for mounting the bracket 557 to leg member 98 ′.
- Bracket 557 may be injection moulded or otherwise formed from a plastic, or moulded from a metal.
- Panel 72 ′ may additionally have an integral pocket 536 ′.
- Pocket 536 ′ may be defined on one side by panel 72 ′, and on another side by a generally opposed side 540 ′, which is joined to panel 72 ′ by a bottom 538 ′.
- Bottom 538 ′ may located at substantially right angles to both panel 72 ′ and side 540 ′ to form a three-sided pocket.
- bottom 538 ′ may be angled to a greater or lesser degree relative to panel 72 ′ and/or side 540 ′ to change the orientation of an item contained within pocket 536 ′, as described above for pocket 536 .
- a single sheet for example, of a metal such as steel, may be used to form panel 72 ′ and pocket 536 ′ by making two folds therein to define panel 72 ′, bottom 538 ′ and wall 540 ′, respectively.
- the sheet thus formed may have a generally right angled J-shaped cross-section which cross-section terminates at opposed edges 559 and 561 which generally trace the J-shaped cross-section.
- panel 72 ′ may be formed to have a rounded generally J- or U-shaped cross-section, or some other shape defining an integral pocket (not shown), by bending a single sheet of metal or other appropriate material, accordingly.
- bottom 538 ′ may include one or more holes (not shown) to permit drainage of a liquid such as rain water from pocket 536 ′.
- Pocket 536 ′ may additionally be bounded by panel mounting brackets 557 adjacent respective opposed edges 559 and 561 to define a five-sided pocket including wall 540 ′, panel 72 ′, mounting brackets 557 , and bottom 538 ′.
- Brackets 557 may be removably attached to wall 540 ′, panel 72 ′, and bottom 538 ′ along edges thereof. Each bracket 557 abuts respective edges 559 or 561 to removably retain wall 540 ′, panel 72 ′, and bottom 538 ′ therebetween.
- Brackets 557 may additionally include one or more flanges for abutting a surface of one or more of wall 540 ′, panel 72 ′, and bottom 538 ′, to inhibit movement thereof.
- the flanges of bracket 557 preferably abut the respective wall 540 ′, panel 72 ′, or bottom 538 ′, adjacent edge 559 (or 561 , as the case may be).
- bracket 557 has a flange 563 for abutting a surface of wall 540 ′ adjacent edge 559 .
- flanges 565 and 567 abut panel 72 ′ and bottom 538 ′, respectively.
- additional flanges may be added to bracket 557 to abut an opposite surface of wall 540 ′, panel 72 ′, and bottom 538 ′.
- discontinuous flange 569 having flange portions 569 a , 569 b , 569 c , and 569 d , may abut a surface of panel 72 ′ opposite to flange 567 .
- a portion of edge 559 may rest between discontinuous flange 569 and flange 567 .
- a flange 571 may abut a surface of wall 540 ′ opposite to flange 563 .
- Flanges 571 and 563 may be joined at ends thereof by a rounded or angled flange 585 , which may reinforce the connected flanges 571 and 563 .
- flanges may also have reinforcements.
- flange 569 a may have a reinforcing flange 573 . Reinforcements may also increase the overall rigidity of bracket 557 .
- Panel 72 ′ may additionally include one or more holes 575 located adjacent one or both edges 559 and 561 for receiving one or more respective tabs 577 which project from a flange of bracket 557 , such as flange 567 .
- tab 575 inhibits movement of panel 72 ′ in a direction generally transverse to the projection of tab 577 to inhibit removal of bracket 557 from panel 72 ′.
- Panel 72 ′ may additionally have an angle 579 formed therein for directing a free end 581 of panel 72 ′ to locate adjacent console 86 when barbeque 60 is fully assembled.
- Angle 579 may traverse panel 72 ′ between edges 559 and 561 causing free end 581 to be displaced from the plane of panel 72 ′.
- Free end 581 is preferably displaced to the same side of panel 72 ′ that side 540 ′ is located.
- Brackets 557 may be likewise angled to accommodate angle 579 .
- bracket 557 may have angle 583 formed therein.
- brackets 557 with the integral wall 540 ′, panel 72 ′, and bottom 538 ′, portions of edge 559 are inserted between opposed flanges 567 and 569 , and between flanges 571 and 563 , with a portion of bottom 538 ′ abutting flange 565 .
- Edge 561 is similarly inserted between the flanges of the remaining bracket 557 . As each edge 559 and 561 is inserted, tab 577 enters and locates within hole 575 . Tab 577 may additionally be ramped, to permit edge 559 (or 561 ) to be guided over tab 577 before tab enters hole 575 .
- Ramped tab 577 preferably has a generally right-angle triangle cross-section so that a snap fit may be formed as ramped tab 577 enters hole 575 .
- Brackets 557 including panel 72 ′ held therebetween, may then be attached to support members 62 ′ and 64 ′ in a manner similar to that described for panel 72 .
- brackets 557 may have a slot or groove instead of, or in addition to, flanges, for receiving edge 559 or 561 .
- Lower casting 78 supports burner 80 and grill plate 82 . Angled bars 88 for deflecting heat may also be supported by lower casting 78 .
- the casting 78 preferably has an interior surface 558 that defines a volume, which volume may be generally box-shaped. The interior surface 558 terminates at an edge 560 defining an opening 562 which may be generally rectangular.
- a closure such as upper casting 76 may be provided to inhibit loss of the heat produced by burners 80 .
- Upper casting 76 preferably has an interior surface (not shown) that defines a volume, which volume may be generally box-shaped. The interior surface terminates at an edge 564 which defines an opening 568 .
- Opening 568 is preferably generally rectangular, with edge 564 substantially conforming to edge 560 of lower casting 78 to reduce spaces or gaps therebetween. This may reduce heat loss from within the grill housing 74 when castings 76 and 78 are in a closed position, as shown in FIG. 32, for example.
- Interior surface 558 of lower casting 78 and the interior surface of upper casting 76 , and their respective edges 560 , 564 may alternatively be configured to define other volumes and openings.
- each of the interior surfaces could define a hemispherical volume and the edges could each define a generally circular opening.
- castings 76 and 78 combine in a closed position to enclose a generally box-shaped volume when they are oriented with their openings 562 and 568 facing each other, and their edges 560 , 564 are aligned. In this closed position, the castings 76 and 78 inhibit heat transfer from within the grill housing 74 to the surrounding environment. Castings 76 and 78 are separable from one another to provide access to at least the grill plate 82 . At least one hinge 570 preferably joins upper casting 76 to lower casting 78 .
- Hinge 570 has a bolt 572 (shown in phantom) which is connected to upper casting 76 , and semi-circular receiving members 574 and 576 , which are connected to lower casting 78 and are configured to receive bolt 572 .
- Bolt 572 may be slidingly inserted between semi-circular receiving members 574 and 576 , to form hinge 570 .
- a free end of bolt 572 may receive a bolt clip 578 to inhibit removal of bolt 572 from its position between receiving members 574 and 576 .
- An axial groove or head 580 may be included at the bolt free end to inhibit axial removal of bolt clip 578 .
- a handle 582 connected to upper casting 76 , may be gripped to move upper casting 76 relative to lower casting 78 .
- Handle 582 is preferably made of a heat resistant material such as wood or an appropriate plastic so that it remains relatively cool to the touch even when the castings 76 and 78 are hot.
- Heat resistant gaskets 584 sandwiched between handle 582 and casting 76 , may be installed to inhibit heat transfer between casting 76 and handle 582 .
- Handle 582 may be attached to casting 76 using at least one, and preferably two, fasteners in the nature of threaded posts 586 projecting from ends of handle 582 ′ (shown in FIG. 2) or bolts 588 for insertion into handle 582 (as shown in FIG. 1).
- handle 582 or 582 ′ The installation of either handle 582 or 582 ′ is similar.
- the generally parallel threaded posts 586 are inserted into handle holes 590 passing through upper casting 76 .
- a gasket or gaskets 584 ′ may be placed between handle 582 ′ and casting 76 .
- threaded posts 586 may be manually secured by either wing-nuts 592 or in some other manner to hold handle 582 fixed adjacent to casting 76 .
- a temperature gauge 594 may also be attached to upper casting 252 in a similar manner as described for handle 582 .
- temperature gauge 594 may be manually installed and fastened, for example, using wing nuts 592 or speed nuts (not shown).
- the shape of the castings 76 and 78 may be modified from a general box-shape, as described below.
- lower casting 78 may rest on support members 62 and 64 .
- a fastener such as bolt 596 may be used to inhibit movement of lower casting 78 relative to support members 62 and 64 .
- Bolt 596 may be inserted into a hole or casting bore 598 passing through lower casting 78 , wherein bore 598 is substantially coaxial with a threaded bore 600 in bridging member 102 or 104 when lower casting 78 is aligned for assembly to member 62 , 64 .
- bolt 596 is inserted through casting bore 598 , starting adjacent interior surface 558 .
- Bolt 596 is then received by threaded bore 600 and tightened to attach lower casting 78 to bridging member 102 or 104 .
- bridging members 102 and 104 are preferably identical to one another, the description for one applies to the other. Bridging members 102 and 104 may also be symmetrical about their longitudinal centrelines. This configuration permits identical bridging member configurations to be used for both bridging member 102 and 104 , which may reduce tooling and manufacturing costs. For example, to use a bridging member 102 as bridging member 104 , the bridging member need only to be rotated 180 degrees about its longitudinal axis. To limit repetition, only one half of the symmetrical bridging members is described. It will be understood that the undescribed other half of the symmetrical bridging has as similar structure.
- Each bridging member for example member 102 , may be provided with at least one flange 602 having the threaded bore 600 .
- Flange 602 additionally provides a support surface 604 for supporting lower casting 78 .
- support surface 604 is preferably generally horizontally oriented and located at about waist height.
- support surface 604 may be located 26 inches from the base ends 110 , 112 of leg members 98 , 100 .
- Increased rigidity of bridging member 102 may be achieved by including at least one, and preferably four, protuberances 606 formed therein.
- Protuberances 606 preferably protrude by a distance that is substantially the same as the thickness of the material from which bridging member 102 is made, and have a generally symmetrical shape such as a rectangle or oval. At least two protuberances 606 straddle each bend 608 (which is formed by flange 602 ) so that bend 608 lies along a longitudinal centerline of each protuberance 606 . Instead of including protuberances 606 , increased rigidity of bridging member 102 may be achieved by attaching at least one, and preferably four, gussets (not shown) thereto in locations similar to those described for protuberances 606 .
- Posts 614 are preferably spaced apart and equidistant to the axis of shaft 612 to permit increased torsional leverage about the axis of shaft 612 when the bolt 596 is tightened or loosened. Due to the heat produced by the burners 80 , bolt 596 is preferably made of a material, such as cold forged steel, that does not deform when subjected to high temperatures.
- head 610 may alternatively be configured as a manually tightenable fastener in the nature of a nut 610 ′ having a threaded bore 616 through its axis, instead of threaded shaft 612 .
- a member in the nature of a post or a threaded post 612 ′ may be partially threaded into the threaded bore 600 of flange 602 so that it protrudes from support surface 604 .
- Threaded post 612 ′ may alternatively be welded directly to flange 602 . A free end of the threaded post 612 ′ is inserted into the bore 598 passing through the lower casting 78 .
- an alternative threaded post in the nature of a bolt 612 ′′ may be inserted into bore 600 of flange 602 .
- Bolt 612 ′′ additionally has a serrated neck 613 for gripping edges of marginally smaller bore 600 .
- Nut 610 ′′ may be threaded onto bolt 612 ′′ to retain lower casting 78 therebetween.
- the casting 78 may be guided to a preferred alignment relative to the support members 62 and 64 , by employing an alignment device or structure in the nature of at least one, and preferably four, alignment or guide members such as guide posts 620 .
- the alignment structure also encourages alignment of threaded bore 600 with casting bore 598 so that bolt 596 may be readily inserted and threaded therethrough.
- Guide posts 620 protrude from grill housing 74 , and preferably protrude from lower casting 78 , in a direction away from interior surface 558 . Openings or holes in the nature of guide bores 622 , located in flange 602 of bridging member 102 , may receive the guide posts 620 .
- the flanges 602 of each bridging member 102 , 104 preferably each have two spaced-apart guide bores 622 for receiving the respective guide posts 620 .
- the guide posts 620 may protrude from a side, such as bottom 624 , of lower casting 78 , bottom 624 being located generally opposite to the opening 562 of the lower casting 78 .
- Each post 620 may be located adjacent an extremity of bottom 624 , such as at corners 626 .
- the location of guide posts 620 and corresponding bores 622 orients lower casting 78 so that it straddles support members 62 , 64 and is generally balanced, thus reducing the possibility of barbeque 60 tipping.
- Additional guide bores, such as guide bore 628 may be included to accommodate different spacings of guide posts 620 on castings of different size.
- Guide posts 620 may be tapered, being narrower at their distal ends 630 .
- the bases 634 of guide posts 620 are preferably larger than the guide bores 622 .
- the narrower distal ends 630 being smaller than the guide bores 622 , may fit more readily within the guide bores 622 , reducing the need to precisely align the posts 620 with the bores 622 .
- the casting 78 is aligned relative to the supports 62 , 64 , and the edges 632 of the guide bores come into contact with the respective bases 634 of guide posts 620 to preferably form a friction fit between the guide bore edges 632 and guide posts 620 .
- the alignment structure also serves to align the threaded bores 600 and casting bores 598 , to permit insertion and tightening of bolt 596 .
- the guide posts may alternatively protrude from support surface 604 into bores in lower casting 78 (not shown).
- a hollow 636 may be provided in support surface 604 to encourage edges 632 of guide bores 622 to grip guide posts 620 .
- Hollow 636 is defined by adjacent protuberances 606 that are displaced from one another along support surface 604 with an exposed portion of support surface 604 therebetween.
- Hollow 636 is located adjacent threaded bore 600 .
- hollow 636 is located with threaded post 612 ′, passing therethrough.
- lower casting 78 may have a drain in the nature of at least one drain opening 638 .
- Drain opening 638 is preferably centrally located in the bottom 624 , and passes therethrough.
- Bottom 624 may be sloped towards drain opening 638 to encourage draining from substantially the entire bottom 624 of lower casting 78 .
- bottom 624 When in operative position, bottom 624 may be sloped downwards at between five and 15 degrees from the horizontal towards drain opening 638 .
- a cup, tube or other means (not shown) for collecting the drippings may be located beneath drain opening 638 . For example, as shown in Figure FIGS.
- a pair of rotisserie rebates 644 may be provided in edges 560 of lower casting 78 for supporting a rotisserie (not shown).
- the rebates 644 are preferably generally located at the mid points of opposite sides of edges 560 .
- Altering the orientation of two connected components may also cause elastic deformation of at least one of the components. A proportionately greater force may then be required to further deform the component. Accordingly, a component subject to a force becomes stiffer and more resistant to further deformation provided that the yield point for the material has not been reached.
- support 62 ′ may be displaced from its initial position by ⁇ degrees towards beam 66 ′ (see, for example, FIG. 74) or it may be displaced by ⁇ degrees away from beam 66 ′ (see, for example, FIG. 75).
- Minimal displacement is generally required to achieve increased frictional resistance between the connected components.
- an angle ⁇ or ⁇ of less than one degree may be sufficient depending on the relative sizes of the joined components and the amount of play therebetween when in the initial position.
- ⁇ and ⁇ are shown as approximately two degrees. This displacement is emphasized in the Figures for illustrative purposes only. The displacement would typically be smaller than depicted, and may be in the range of 0.5 to 5 degrees.
- bolt 154 may also be subject to increased forces in a number of directions. For example, bolt 154 may experience increased shear force as support member 62 ′ is moved relative to beam 66 ′. Shear forces may be caused by edges or boundaries of hole 156 and bore 158 acting on bolt 154 . If bolt 154 is secured with nut 160 , then bolt 154 may also be subject to tensile forces as connected support member 62 ′ and beam 66 ′ are moved. Any one or more of these forces acting on bolt 154 may inhibit the removal of bolt 154 from within its associated hole 156 and bore 158 . For example, any shear force acting on bolt 154 will increase the friction between bolt 154 and the shear surfaces. Likewise, a tensile force on a secured bolt 154 can increase friction between the engaged threads of bolt 154 and nut 160 .
- connection between support members 62 ′ and 64 ′ and lower casting 78 form at least one friction system that may also be subject to additional forces.
- one or more first friction members in the nature of guide posts 620 and bolt 612 ′ may be subject to additional forces as they resist the deflection of the biased supports 62 ′ and 64 ′. This in turn may encourage increased frictional retention of guide posts 620 and bolt 612 ′ within their respective bores 622 and 598 .
- guide posts 620 may experience greater forces at their interface with associated second friction members, which may include edges 632 of guide bores 622 , when guide posts 620 frictionally co-operate to maintain displacement of supports 62 ′ and 64 ′ in a biased position.
- Bolt 612 ′ may subject to additional forces in a similar manner as described for guide posts 620 . These additional forces are applied at one or more points of connection between lower casting 78 and supports 62 ′ and 64 ′, whether supports 62 ′ and 64 ′ are biased towards cross beam 66 ′ or away from it.
- support 62 ′ is encouraged to a biased position as well.
- the biased position of both supports 62 ′ and 64 ′ may be maintained by inserting remaining guide posts 620 within the guide bores 622 of support 64 ′, as shown in FIG. 77.
- Heads 610 ′ may then be attached to bolts 612 ′ to secure the lower casting 78 to supports 62 ′ and 64 ′.
- Lower casting 78 may be similarly attached to supports 62 ′ and 64 ′ if supports 62 ′ and 64 ′ have an initial position in which they are angled away from cross beam 66 ′.
- barbeque assembly 60 may be likewise assembled according to the principles described above.
- Other embodiments of barbeque 60 such as those illustrated in FIG. 1, may also be configured and assembled in the manner described.
- lower casting 78 contains at least one burner 80 .
- Burner 80 may be an H-shaped burner 80 , a bar-shaped burner 80 ′ (see FIG. 2), or some other appropriate barbeque burner known in the art.
- support members 646 are attached to burners to retain and maintain the burner in a preferred orientation within lower casting 78 .
- the support members 646 of the illustrative embodiments described below permit the burner to be manually installed in and removed from barbeque 60 without tools.
- Support members 646 may be used in combination with many different burner configurations, including the H-shaped burner 80 and bar-shaped burner 80 ′. The attachment and use of the support members 646 is similar in each case. Accordingly, the following description of support members 646 as used in conjunction with an H-shaped burner 80 is an example and may apply in substantially the same manner to burners having different configurations.
- H-shaped barbeque burners typically have four coplanar arms, such as arms 648 of burner 80 . When in a preferred orientation, the four arms 648 of burner 80 are generally horizontal. At least one support member 646 is attached to each arm 648 . Each support member 646 generally uniformly displaces the arms 648 of burner 80 from the lower casting bottom 624 and inhibits movement of burner 80 relative to lower casting 78 . Each support member 646 has a generally planar strip portion 650 . Strip portion 650 may be rectangular, and is preferably constructed from a resilient heat resistant material such as a metal. For example, aluminized steel may be used. Strip portion 650 is attached along an edge (not shown) to arm 648 to generally form a right angle with arm 648 .
- Attachment may be by welding or some other securing means that is not significantly affected by high temperatures.
- strip 650 may have a bend therein to form a toe 652 protruding more or less normal to a longitudinal axis of strip 650 .
- Toe 652 may be welded to arm 648 , thereby providing a larger area for attachment to arm 648 than along an edge of strip 650 .
- burner support member 646 ′ in an alternative embodiment of burner support, burner support member 646 ′ (described below), a toe 652 may additionally include a attachment member 655 for attaching the support member 646 ′ to burner 80 . Attachment member 655 may also be applied to toe 652 in a similar manner.
- Adjacent a free end 654 of strip 650 is a catch 656 for securing strip 650 (and by connection burner 80 ) when catch 656 is inserted into an opening 658 in the bottom 624 of lower casting 78 .
- Catch 656 is preferably generally rectangular in shape, and may be formed from strip 650 by making three incisions in strip 650 , or stamping strip 650 , to define three sides of rectangular catch 656 .
- a fourth side of catch 656 is defined by bending a free end 662 of three-sided catch 656 away from strip 650 to form a bend 660 where catch 656 meets strip 650 .
- Bend 660 is preferably adjacent strip free end 654 , and has an axis which is generally parallel to the plane of arms 648 .
- catch free end 662 is displaced from strip 650 .
- catch free end 662 is preferably displaced by greater than zero and less than 90 degrees from an opening 664 formed by the bending of catch 656 away from strip 650 .
- An angle of about 30 degrees may be defined, for example.
- Support member 646 also has at least one protrusion, such as a shoulder 666 which contacts portions of interior surface 558 of lower casting 78 adjacent to casting opening 658 to prevent further insertion of support member 646 into casting opening 658 .
- support member 646 has two shoulders 666 .
- Shoulders 666 define a neck 669 for insertion into casting opening 658 .
- Shoulders 666 are located at a predetermined distance from arm 648 to provide a preferred displacement of burner arms 648 from lower casting interior surface 558 .
- shoulders 666 may be displaced from arm 648 by between 0.5 and 1 inch, and preferably by 0.65 inches.
- Shoulders 666 may be formed by bending portions of the free parallel sides 670 of strip 650 adjacent free end 654 to form tabs 668 which are preferably perpendicular to the plane of strip 650 .
- the creation of tabs 668 forms shoulders 666 at portions of the free parallel sides 670 , adjacent tabs 668 .
- a transverse cut to define shoulder 666 may be made in each side 670 , before tabs 668 are bent.
- shoulders 666 may be added to strip 650 by welding or by otherwise connecting one or more metal tabs or pieces to strip 650 to inhibit insertion of support member 646 into opening 658 beyond a desired threshold (not shown).
- the tabs 668 being located in planes generally perpendicular to the plane of strip 650 , may also add rigidity to strip 650 .
- Burners such as burner 80 typically have at least one, and frequently two, fuel input ducts 672 . Free ends 674 of ducts 672 have guards, such as spider guards 474 , to prevent insects from entering ducts 672 . Guards 474 engage outlets of console 86 (described below) to receive a mediated flow of fuel which is supplied to the burner 80 via ducts 672 .
- each duct 672 is inserted through separate burner duct passages 676 and 678 , located in lower casting 78 .
- Passages 676 and 678 permit fuel to be delivered from an external source, such as propane tank 90 , via ducts 672 to burner 80 .
- support member free ends 654 are each inserted, preferably concurrently, into their respective lower casting openings 658 . Because the manner in which each support 646 is installed and removed is similar, a description for the installation of just one support 646 is provided.
- Bend 660 enters opening 658 and is followed by catch 656 which angles away from strip 650 , as described above.
- catch 656 may be formed by bending the free end 654 ′ of strip 650 ′ to form a catch 656 ′ and a bend 660 ′ with similar characteristics to those described above.
- Shoulders 666 ′ may be formed by cut-outs or rebates 667 ′ in strip 650 ′.
- Rebates 667 ′ also define free parallel sides 670 ′ of a neck 669 ′ of strip 650 ′, from which catch 656 ′ depends.
- support member 646 ′ is installed into casting opening 658 , and operates, in a similar manner as described above for support member 646 .
- bend 660 ′ enters opening 658 and is followed by neck 669 ′ and catch 656 ′, which angles away from strip 650 ′ and may guide neck 669 ′ into proper alignment within opening 658 .
- catch 656 ′ As catch 656 ′ is inserted further into opening 658 , it encounters an edge of opening 658 and is caused to move closer to neck 669 ′ to a depressed position to permit further insertion.
- catch 656 ′ clears opening 658 it resiliently returns to its initial position and is positioned adjacent opening 658 . In this position, catch 656 ′ inhibits removal of neck 669 ′ from opening 658 .
- Opening 658 may be generally rectangular in shape, having a length of approximately 0.45 inches and a width of approximately 0.3 inches, wherein its length runs generally parallel to an axis of bend 660 ′ when neck 669 ′ is installed therein.
- neck 669 ′ may have a width of marginally less than 0.45 inches so that free parallel sides 670 ′ abut or are adjacent to opposed parallel edges of opening 658 when neck 669 ′ is located within opening 658 .
- supports 646 ′ may be positioned to co-operate so that neck 669 ′ of each support 646 ′ abuts or is adjacent to another edge of opening 658 .
- support member 646 ′ may additionally have a hole therethrough (not shown) for optionally receiving a removable pin such as a cotter pin which further inhibits removal of support member 646 ′ from opening 658 .
- burner support member 646 ′ may additional include an indent or embossment 659 which may increase the rigidity of strip 650 ′.
- Embossment 659 may be substantially linear and may run along a longitudinal centerline of strip 650 ′. It may additionally traverse a portion of neck 669 ′.
- the rectangular catch may be fashioned from the strip by making two incisions in the strip at right angles to one another to define adjacent sides of the rectangular catch.
- a third side of the catch is a portion of an edge of the strip, and the fourth side of catch is defined by bending the three-sided catch away from strip to form a bend where the catch is attached to the strip.
- the axis of the bend is generally parallel to the plane of arms 648 .
- the catch may be added to the strip by welding or other connection means to provide a catch with the preferred properties described above.
- the fuel used by burner 80 is preferably a pressurized combustible gas, such as propane, that is appropriate for gas barbeques. Because the fuel is pressurized, it is forced into the burner 80 and may be released via a plurality of fuel openings 682 in the walls of the burner 80 . The flow of fuel is mediated by console 86 , described below. Fuel openings 682 permit fuel to be released into the interior 684 of lower casting 78 . The fuel may then be ignited. The fuel openings 682 are preferably located adjacent to a plane that bisects all arms 648 of the H-shaped burner 80 .
- a pressurized combustible gas such as propane
- a standard igniter such as electronic ignition 686 is attached and retained by igniter clip 688 to burner 80 adjacent the fuel openings 682 of at least two arms 648 having a common longitudinal axis.
- Igniter activation assembly 690 which includes an igniter activation knob 692 , is attached to console 86 , and connected to igniter 686 via igniter wire 694 (see FIG. 1).
- Openings 702 located adjacent to valleys 698 permit drippings that are not vapourized to drop to lower casting bottom 624 , to be drawn by gravity to drain opening 638 .
- At least one and preferably two support struts 704 for supporting angled bars 88 traverse the interior 684 of lower casting 78 , and are located between burners 80 and angled bars 88 .
- At least one and preferably two locating tabs 712 projecting from each strut 704 may enter an opening 702 of angled bars 88 to encourage a preferred orientation of angled bars 88 , and to inhibit movement of angled bars 88 relative to strut 704 , once angled bars 88 are installed.
- Barbeque 60 may also be provided with a warming rack 84 , that may be in the form of at least one cantilevered shelf 720 for supporting food at a greater distance from burners 80 than food located on grill plate 82 . As a result of this greater distance, food supported by warming rack 84 receives less heat than food located on grill plate 82 .
- Warming rack 84 may be installed by inserting mounting pins 722 into mounting pin holes 724 located in upper casting 76 . Once the pins 722 are inserted, toes 726 of warming rack support legs 408 may be inserted into toe holes (not shown) or may rest in rebates 644 located in edges 560 of lower casting 78 . Either, or both, grill plate 82 and warming rack 84 may be made from wire, chrome wire, heavy duty porcelain coated wire, porcelainized metal, cast iron or porcelainized cast iron.
- the console body 734 is made using a die (not shown) which imparts shape to console body 734 , by impressing the single sheet of metal into a corresponding mould to produce the desired form of console body 734 . Holes 736 and 738 in console body 734 permit knob stems 740 and 742 to protrude therethrough. Knob stems 740 and 742 may then be inserted into respective receptacles in control knobs 744 and 746 , forming a friction or mechanical fit.
- Lateral edges 754 of console 86 may have at least one rebate in the nature of a notch 756 and preferably two notches, including notch 758 , for receiving tabs 750 and 752 .
- Tab 750 preferably lies in a plane generally transverse to the plane of notch 756
- tab 752 preferably lies in a plane generally transverse to the plane of notch 758 .
- Notches 756 and 758 receive edges 760 and 762 of tabs 750 and 752 to support console 86 thereon.
- One or both of notches 756 and 758 may additionally have a slot 764 therein for receiving an edge 760 or 762 of a corresponding tab, for example tab 750 , when the tab is placed therein.
- Slot 764 preferably is substantially the same thickness as tab 750 , and is sufficiently wide to permit entry of an edge 760 of tab 750 but is sufficiently narrow to limit movement of console 86 relative to tab 750 .
- the remaining tab 752 when placed within notch 756 also inhibits movement of console 86 . This arrangement permits console 86 to be placed upon and supported by tabs 750 and 752 to maintain console 86 in a preferred orientation before it is secured.
- Each bridging member 102 and 104 has a securing protrusion 766 for securing console 86 thereto.
- Protrusion 766 may be perpendicular to both support surface 604 and tabs 750 and 752 , and is parallel and adjacent to console side 768 when console 86 is placed on tabs 750 and 752 .
- Protrusion 766 lies on the concave side of console 86 and has a threaded bore 770 for receiving a fastener inserted through a corresponding hole 772 in console side 768 .
- the fastener may be a screw, and is preferably a bolt 774 (see FIG. 39A and 39B) that may be installed and removed by hand.
- Turning of the bolt 774 about its longitudinal axis may also be improved by using a non-circular or non-uniform shaped head (not shown) with the threaded end 780 preferably protruding along an axis passing through a centroid of the head 778 .
- the head 778 may be made of any rigid material, such as nylon plastic or a metal.
- Flange 780 may additionally have tabs 784 at either end thereof.
- console 86 ′ is supported on support surfaces 262 along edges 786 of tabs 784 .
- Tabs 784 each extend generally perpendicularly from flange 780 , and abut, or may be attached to, console sides 768 ′. While tabs 784 may be co-planar with sides 768 ′, they preferably lie in a planes parallel to sides 768 ′, and are marginally closer to one another than if they were co-planar with sides 768 ′. Because they are in marginally different parallel planes, each tab 784 meets a respective side 768 ′ at a radiused boundary 788 . The displacement of tab 784 from side 768 ′ permits protrusion 766 to lie on the concave side of console 86 ′, in a similar manner as described for console 86 ′.
- console 86 ′ to bridging member 104 .
- any form of protrusion may be used as long as receiving bore 770 is positioned to receive fastener 382 to secure console 86 ′ to bridging members 102 , 104 .
- a fuel hose (not shown) may be connected to control valves 730 , 732 .
- the fuel hose has a connector, for example as manufactured by Marshall Gas of San Marcos, Tex., that may be hand tightened to tank 90 , or some other fuel source.
- console 86 may be attached to barbeque 60 by fasteners for attaching console 86 to corresponding ends of bridging members 102 and 104 .
- the fasteners are preferably bolts 774 . Openings, in the nature of holes, pass through the bridging member ends, and receive a threaded end 780 of bolt 774 .
- the threaded end 780 may be further received by a corresponding bore in console 86 , which may be a bushing, fixed in the console body, the bushing having internal threads for threaded engagement with the threaded end 780 .
- the holes in the bridging member ends are smaller than the head 778 of bolt 774 to inhibit head 778 from passing therethrough.
- each end may be provided with flanges.
- the flanges are preferably located to abut a side of console 86 that is substantially parallel to an axis of rotation that is coaxial with the console bolts 774 connecting console 86 to bridging members 102 and 104 .
- bolt 774 may be a nut (not shown).
- a threaded post may be partially threaded into each of the bushings as described for the previous embodiment, to protrude from the console 86 .
- Console 86 may then be secured by inserting the threaded posts into the bridging member holes, and then tightening the nuts about the threaded posts. Because the threaded post is preferably first connected to console 86 , it may further serve as a locator for positioning the console 86 relative to the bridging members 102 and 104 .
- console 86 and panel 72 may be configured and installed so that corresponding edges thereof abut each other to inhibit movement of one relative to the other.
- Movement of barbeque 60 may be discouraged by adding leg extensions 114 to all leg members 98 and 100 .
- Wheels 94 , casters 96 and leg extensions 114 are preferably attached so that grill plate 82 is substantially horizontal when barbeque 60 is assembled and in an operative position.
- leg extensions 114 support barbeque 60 and protect base ends 110 and 112 of leg members 98 and 100 .
- the height of grill plate 82 , and the other components of barbeque 60 may be varied by attaching leg extensions 114 having a desired length to all legs 98 , 100 , and not attaching any wheels 94 or casters 96 to barbeque 60 . Because leg extensions 114 are attached to legs 98 and 100 in the same manner, description for the attachment of one extension is provided.
- a plug end 790 of leg extension 114 substantially conforms to the size and shape of a void (not shown) in base end 110 of leg member 98 .
- the void is the internal space typically defined by a hollow leg member, such as leg member 98 , having a generally tubular, rectangular or other cross-sectional shape.
- Plug end 790 terminates at a peripheral shoulder 792 defined by a support end 794 of leg extension 114 . Varying the length of support end 794 affects the horizontal displacement of barbeque 60 .
- Leg extension 114 may be installed by inserting plug end 790 into the void of leg member 98 until shoulder 792 encounters leg member 98 to prevent further insertion of the extension 114 . Because plug end 790 preferably substantially conforms to the void in leg member 98 , it may be retained in place by friction. To permit easier insertion of plug end 790 , plug end 790 may have longitudinal rebates 796 , for example forming ribs 798 , to reduce the frictional interface between plug end 790 and leg member 98 .
- FIG. 2 shows leg extension 114 ′ having an alternative configuration for insertion into a leg member 98 ′ having a void with a rectangular cross-section. The cross-sectional shape of support end 794 may be varied and does not have to be similar to that of plug end 790 .
- Leg extension 114 may be secured to leg member 98 using a fastener, such as slotted pin 186 (see FIG. 12B).
- Leg member 98 has a hole 800 passing laterally therethrough for receiving slotted pin 186 .
- Hole 800 has an entry 800 a and an exit (not shown).
- plug end 790 of leg extension 114 has a hole 802 , passing laterally therethrough for receiving pin 186 .
- Hole 802 has an entry 802 a and an exit (not shown).
- the respective entries 800 a , 802 a and the exits are aligned. Slotted pin 186 may then inserted therethrough to hinder movement of the leg extension 114 relative to the leg member 98 .
- the slotted pin 186 preferably has a head 188 , which is larger than entry 800 a to inhibit movement of pin 186 along its longitudinal axis within the holes 800 , 802 .
- Pin 186 may also have a catch 189 to inhibit longitudinal movement of the pin 186 within the holes 800 , 802 .
- Catch 189 is located at the insertion end 190 of pin 186 .
- End 190 is located opposite to head 188 .
- Catch 189 may be marginally larger than the exit of hole 800 of leg 98 to inhibit pin 186 from being removed once end 190 is fully inserted through the exit hole.
- end 190 may be tapered.
- end 190 may have at least one and preferably three partially transverse slots 192 emanating from a central longitudinal axis of pin 186 .
- Each slot 192 is preferably uniformly angularly displaced from the another.
- slots 192 permit end 190 to narrow facilitating passage of catch 189 , therethrough.
- Slotted pin 186 may be made of a resilient material such as a plastic so that end 190 returns to its original shape once it passes through the exit of hole 800 and catch 189 inhibits removal of pin 186 .
- Caster plugs 804 receive casters 96 to permit rolling movement of barbeque 60 as described above. As with the description of leg extensions 114 , a description for the attachment of one caster plug 804 is provided and applies to the attachment of all caster plugs 804 .
- caster plug 804 has a shoulder 806 to inhibit further insertion of the caster plug 804 into the void (not shown) in base end 110 of leg member 98 .
- Shoulder 806 is preferably of sufficient thickness to prevent deformation of shoulder when in use. For example, a shoulder thickness of 0.04 inches may be used.
- caster plug 804 has an axial bore 808 for receiving a caster post 810 of a standard caster, for example caster 96 .
- Axial bore 808 may have a circumferential rib (not shown) for engaging a corresponding circumferential groove 812 of caster post 810 to inhibit removal of caster post 810 .
- Caster plug 804 may be further retained using a slotted pin 186 in substantially the same manner as described for retention of the leg extension 114 .
- the general configuration of caster plug 804 may also be varied to accommodate leg members of different cross-sectional shapes.
- a caster plug (not shown) may be configured for use with rectangular leg member 98 ′.
- slotted pins 186 may perform the additional function of securing tank base 92 to the adjacent leg members 98 , 100 .
- slotted pins 186 are installed in a similar manner as described above, except each pin 186 also engages a conduit 170 of tank base 92 , as described below.
- each leg member 98 , 100 is inserted through a respective conduit 170 attached to or, preferably, integrally formed with base 92 .
- Conduits 170 preferably have a lateral cross-section substantially equal to or larger than the size and shape of the lateral cross-section of the respective leg members 98 , 100 . This permits the leg members to be inserted through the conduits 170 . If the cross-sections of the conduits 170 and leg members 98 , 100 are substantially the same size, then a friction fit may be formed between the each conduit 170 and leg member 98 , 100 .
- conduits 170 may be moved along leg members 98 , 100 .
- Conduits 170 are attached to leg members 98 , 100 using slotted pins 186 in substantially the same manner as described above for attaching strut 118 to leg members 98 , 100 , with the additional step of inserting leg extensions 114 or caster plugs 804 before inserting pin 186 .
- Wheel 94 may attached to leg member 98 using an axle, such as axle pin 814 , inserted through hole 800 in leg member 98 . This may be the same hole used to retain caster plugs 804 and leg extensions 114 . Once attached, wheel 94 may freely rotate about axle pin 814 to facilitate moving of barbeque 60 , as described above.
- axle pin 814 an axle, such as axle pin 814 , inserted through hole 800 in leg member 98 . This may be the same hole used to retain caster plugs 804 and leg extensions 114 . Once attached, wheel 94 may freely rotate about axle pin 814 to facilitate moving of barbeque 60 , as described above.
- Axle lock 824 may be attached to barbeque 60 by first inserting axle pin 814 through hole 800 in leg member 98 . Axle lock 824 may then be attached by inserting C-shaped channel 828 into the void of hollow leg member 98 . C-shaped channel 828 may be aligned and brought into contact with securing portion 830 of axle 814 . As increased force is applied to axle lock 824 to urge securing portion 830 into channel 828 , resilient edges 832 of channel 828 deform and part to permit securing portion 830 to enter channel 828 . Resilient edges 832 then return to their initial position to retain securing portion 830 within channel 828 (shown in FIG. 42B).
- securing portion 830 may be provided with a groove in the nature of a transverse or circumferential groove 834 that receives a stop in the nature of an transverse rib 836 of channel 828 .
- Rib 836 may be arcuate, corresponding to the shape of channel 828 and may laterally traverse channel 828 .
- Axle lock 824 is preferably constructed from a resilient plastic or metal. If axle lock 824 is made of a plastic then body 826 may have a cross-section marginally larger than the cross-section of the void in leg member 98 so that axle lock 824 may be better retained therein. As the marginally larger axle lock 824 is inserted into the void of leg member 98 , edges 832 of the void entrance preferably engage and peel back or otherwise remove peripheral portions of body 826 before it is able to enter the void. While this installation may require added force to be applied to axle lock 824 , it may lead to a more precise mating of the axle lock 824 and the void.
- axle lock 824 ′′′ may be configured to fit voids in leg members such as leg members 98 ′ and 100 ′ having alternative cross-sections such as a rectangular cross-section.
- axle 814 ′ may be secured in place with an alternative axle lock 824 ′.
- Axle lock 824 ′ has a body 826 ′ that is preferably similar in shape to axle lock 824 , but body 826 ′ differs in that it has a transverse, bore 828 ′ therethrough adjacent an end thereof for engaging a securing portion 830 ′ of axle pin 814 ′, instead of C-shaped channel 828 .
- Securing portion 830 ′ is located between end 816 ′ and shoulder 820 ′ of axle pin 814 ′.
- Axle lock 824 ′ may be attached to barbeque 60 by first inserting body 824 ′ having bore 828 ′ into the void of hollow leg member 98 . Bore 828 ′ may be aligned with hole 800 in leg member 98 . Axle pin 814 ′ may then be inserted into an entrance of hole 800 and into bore 828 ′. Pin 814 ′ preferably has a tapered end 829 to guide pin 814 ′ into bore 828 ′. Bore 828 ′ may have a corresponding tapered opening 831 which co-operates with tapered end 829 to guide axle pin 814 ′ into bore 828 ′. Pin end 829 may then exit bore 828 ′ at a second opening 833 ′ of bore 828 ′, and may pass through an exit of hole 800 in leg 98 to inhibit removal of axle lock 824 ′ from leg member 98 .
- Second opening 833 may be marginally smaller than a cross section of axle pin end 829 .
- end 829 may be tapered.
- Bore 828 ′ may additionally have a co-operating taper 837 , adjacent second opening 833 , to direct pin 814 ′ therethrough.
- portions of body 826 ′ adjacent second opening 833 may be resilient.
- second opening 833 may have at least one and preferably three slots 835 emanating from a central longitudinal axis of bore 828 ′.
- Each slot 835 is preferably uniformly angularly displaced from the other.
- slots 835 permit opening 833 to widen, facilitating passage of end 829 therethrough.
- Axle lock is preferably made of a resilient material such as a plastic so that second opening 833 returns to its original shape once axle pin end 829 passes therethrough, and so that significant manual force is not required to encourage pin end 829 through second opening 833 .
- axle pin 814 ′ may be provided with an indent or groove in the nature of circumferential groove 834 ′ for receiving retaining portions 839 of body 826 ′ which generally define second opening 833 . Once axle pin end 816 ′ passes through second opening 833 , resilient retaining portions 839 enter groove 834 ′ to inhibit removal of pin 814 ′ from bore 828 ′.
- axle lock 824 ′′ may be configured to fit voids in leg members such as leg members 98 ′ and 100 ′ having alternative cross-sections such as a rectangular cross-section.
- Alternative axle lock 824 ′′ may co-operate with alternative axle pin 814 ′′ (shown in FIGS. 70A and 70B) to retain wheel 94 .
- axle pin 814 is installed in a manner similar to that described above for attachment of the leg extension 114 and caster plug 804 .
- axle pin 814 is inserted additionally through conduit entry hole 174 a and exit hole 174 b to also retain conduit 170 about leg member 98 or 100 .
- Wheel bore 818 may be protected to some degree from dirt and other matter that may interfere with the rotation of wheel 94 about axle pin 814 .
- a cover in the nature of a circular hub cap 838 may be attached to head 822 of axle pin 814 to inhibit passage of matter between axle 814 and bore 818 .
- Head 822 may have a circumferential flange 840 for engagement by a hub cap clip 842 having two or more arms 844 which protrude from a side of hub cap 838 .
- Arms 844 extend in the same general direction, normal to the plane of hub cap 838 , and may have protrusions 846 at their distal or free ends 848 for engaging flange 840 of head 822 .
- Arms 844 may be located to engage flange 840 while being generally equidistant from one another and generally equidistant from the axis of hub cap 838 .
- Free ends 848 are preferably resilient to permit grasping of flange 840 , as described below.
- hub cap 838 may have at least one circumferential flange 850 for engagement by a corresponding circumferential groove 852 of wheel 94 .
- barbeque 60 All components of barbeque 60 , as described above, are preferably made of weather resistant material and/or heat resistant material, as appropriate.
- Control valves 730 and 732 may be installed within console body 734 , handle 582 may be attached to upper casting 76 , and wheels 94 and casters 96 (or leg extensions 114 ) may be attached to legs 98 and 100 . While a partially pre-assembled barbeque 60 may occupy a greater volume than a conventional unassembled barbeque, the potential corresponding increase in labour and shipping costs, may be nominal.
- the ladder-like supports 62 and 64 are placed on a generally level surface with free ends 204 and 206 of supporting portion 340 and 198 pointing generally upwards. Shelves 68 and 70 may then be assembled thereon in the manner described above to form a snap fit. A snap fit may be achieved by manually exerting a force in a generally downward direction, opposite the direction of insertion D, at a free end 377 of shelf 68 , 70 . If applicable, shelf frame 372 and or burner frame 436 may be similarly installed.
- shelves 68 and 70 may be attached after the combined supports 62 and 64 and a cross beam 66 are re-oriented so that the support members 62 and 64 rest on their base ends 110 and 112 , as described below.
- Support members 62 and 64 may then be oriented on the flat surface with base ends 110 and 112 pointing upwards with support members 62 and 64 supported by shelves 68 and 70 . Accordingly, supports 62 and 64 are generally vertically oriented. Beam receptacles 120 and 124 may then be oriented towards each other. Ends 92 of cross beam 66 may be inserted into the respective receptacles 120 and 124 with the threaded bushings 102 of cross beam 66 aligned with holes 100 . Holes 100 receive screws 96 , which may be inserted in a generally downward direction, and which may be manually tightened to secure beam ends 92 to receptacles 120 and 124 , in the manner described above. If not pre-assembled, wheels 94 , casters 96 , and/or leg extensions 114 , may be installed either before or after cross beam 66 is attached to support members 62 and 64 .
- the rigid three-sided barbeque grill housing support structure having two ladder-like supports 62 and 64 , and a cross beam 66 , may be re-oriented so that the support members 62 and 64 rest on their base ends 110 and 112 (or wheels 94 , casters 96 , and/or leg extensions 114 , if previously assembled).
- the support members 62 and 64 , and cross beam 66 combine to form a self-supported frame or barbeque support structure.
- Other components of the barbeque 60 may then be conveniently attached to the support structure.
- support members 62 and 64 , and cross beam 66 are assembled by joining one side of the structure (support member 62 ) to the other side (support member 64 ). This generally differs from many barbeques known in the art which are assembled from the bottom up, beginning with a lower shelf or base and then bolting individual vertical leg members thereto (not shown).
- the removable members 370 may be placed within frames 372 and encouraged to frictionally or snap fit within frame 372 by application of a downward force thereon when they are aligned within frame 372 . If a gravity fit is used, the removable members 370 need only be placed within frame 372 in a downward direction.
- front panel 72 may then be assembled between support members 62 and 64 .
- This play permits bridging members 102 and 104 to be moved away from one another.
- the displacement of bridging members 102 and 104 permits mounting pins 546 to be consecutively mounted into their respective mounting holes 550 in the leg members 98 and 100 .
- Support members 62 and 64 may then be returned to their original position to retain pins 546 in holes 550 .
- panel 72 may be pivoted about pins 546 into position as mounting clips 552 are snapped in place onto their respective legs 98 and 100 .
- front panel 72 may be installed by concurrently sliding both clips 552 onto legs 98 and 100 . Clips 552 may then be slid into place and mounting pins 546 can then be inserted into their respective holes 550 .
- This mounting method for panel 72 may be preferable over the former method if the clip 552 is mounted at a mid-point of clip 552 , making it difficult to bend a free ends 556 of clip 552 sufficiently to permit passage of leg member 98 , 100 into clip 552 .
- the next step in assembling barbeque 60 is attaching console 86 to the bridging members 102 and 104 in the manner described above.
- the console 86 is placed onto tabs 750 and 752 so that slots 764 receive a corresponding tab 750 and 752 .
- Bolt 774 may then be secured by manually inserting it into hole 772 and tightening it in threaded bore 770 . In the preferred orientation of bore 770 , bolt 774 may be installed horizontally. This step may be alternatively be completed after installation of the lower casting 78 , or any of the components thereof.
- Tapered guide posts 620 of lower casting 78 may then be aligned with and inserted into guide bores 622 .
- the lower casting 78 may be retained by a generally downward insertion and manual tightening of bolts 254 through casting bores 258 and into threaded bores 256 . If post 612 ′ is used then nut 610 ′ is tightened on to post 612 ′ in a generally downward direction.
- lower casting 78 may be installed after installation of front panel 72 .
- Burner 80 may then be installed in the manner described above.
- burner 80 may be placed within lower casting 78 , and free ends 674 of each duct 672 are inserted through separate burner duct passages 316 and 318 .
- Support members 646 are then inserted and secured within openings 658 by applying a generally downward force to form a snap fit with lower casting 78 .
- burner 80 may be installed after both lower casting 78 and console 86 are installed, in which case igniter wire 694 may be attached to console 86 after burner 80 is installed.
- Side burner assembly 434 may then be installed in the manner described above.
- Side shelf 68 may alternatively be installed after burner assembly 434 is installed.
- handle 582 and temperature gauge 594 may be attached to upper casting 76 .
- Upper casting 76 may then be attached to lower casting 78 , or installed at a later step as described below.
- the components of the ignition assembly may be assembled by fastening, for example with bolts or screws, the igniter activation assembly 690 to the concave side of console 86 .
- Igniter activation knob 692 is attached to igniter activation assembly 690 from the convex side of console 86 .
- the igniter activation assembly 690 is then connected to igniter 688 via igniter wire 694 .
- Igniter 694 may be clipped or otherwise attached between burner 80 and console 86 .
- support struts 704 are placed onto fins 706 , and one or more openings 702 of angled bars 88 are placed over locating tabs 346 of the support struts 704 .
- One or more grill plates 82 may then be placed to be supported by ledges 718 .
- the hinge bolts 572 of upper casting 76 are aligned and slidingly engaged with receiving members 574 and 576 of the lower casting 78 , and may then be retained by clip 578 .
- Cantilevered warming rack 84 may then be installed by inserting mounting pins 722 into mounting pin holes 724 located in upper casting 76 .
- toes 726 of warming rack support legs 408 may be placed into rebates 644 located in edges 240 of lower casting 78 .
- handle 582 may be attached through holes 590 in upper casting 76 , using hand tightened bolts 588
- temperature gauge 594 may be attached through holes 595 in upper casting 76 , using hand tightened wing nuts 592 .
- shelf tray 370 , shelf slats 408 , and/or the elements of burner 222 or 222 ′ may be attached in the manner described above.
- tank 90 may be placed in base 92 , and attached to a fuel connector, which is tightened manually. If an alternate fuel source is used, this may be attached to control valves 730 , 732 .
- the method of assembly described above permits most of the barbeque components to be conveniently installed from a generally top down or horizontal direction.
- the following connections may be made in a generally top down direction: attaching cross beam 66 to beam connection members 116 and 122 using bolts 200 ; installing leg extensions 114 or caster plugs 804 to leg 98 or 100 ; attaching shelf 68 to shelf supporting portions 340 and 342 ; positioning lower casting 74 relative to bridging member 102 ; securing nut 610 ′ to bolt 612 ′ to attach lower casting 74 to bridging member 102 ; attaching burner 80 to lower casting 74 ; and moving engaging member 345 to engage tank collar 316 .
- console 86 may be placed upon and supported by tabs 750 and 752 to maintain console 86 in a preferred orientation before it is secured. Installation of components requiring fastening from a bottom up direction is limited.
- the various features described above may enable manufactures to ship unassembled barbeques to reduce costs, while providing a barbeque that may be readily and quickly assembled by unskilled consumers.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Food Science & Technology (AREA)
- Baking, Grill, Roasting (AREA)
Abstract
A barbeque grill housing support structure having a first member and a second member for supporting the grill housing, and a cross member fastened between the first and second members. The first member is oriented in an initial position relative to the cross member. A biasing member attached to the first member and the second member is included to displace the first member to a biased position in which the first member is displaced from the cross member relative to the initial position. This arrangement can be used to stiffen the overall barbeque support structure and increase any friction between adjoined members and their respective fasteners.
Description
- The present invention relates generally to the field of cooking apparatus, and more particularly to barbeques such as outdoor gas fuelled barbeques.
- To reduce manufacturing, shipping and storage costs, barbeque grill manufacturers often ship unassembled barbeques to retailers for subsequent assembly by consumers. While some manufacturers may provide barbeques with a number of components pre-assembled, consumers are generally required to assemble at least some part of the barbeque. This assembly often requires consumers to follow detailed instructions to combine a plurality of barbeque components. These components may include: an upper and lower casting containing burners and a grill, shelves, a console for regulating the flow of fuel to the burners, and a structure for supporting the upper and lower castings. Following assembly of the various barbeque components, a fuel source is connected to the barbeque. The fuel source may be a tank containing pressurized propane, which should be safely secured to the barbeque support structure.
- To assemble the barbeque, the support members and one or more of the other components may be securely fastened to one another. For example, a typical barbeque may require that over twenty such connections be made by a consumer. Common tools such as screwdrivers and wrenches may also be required. Since not all consumers have a facility with such tools or with interpreting assembly instructions for the barbeque, assembly of the barbeque may be a relatively complex and frustrating process, which could take a significant amount of time to complete.
- Difficulty may also be encountered due to the required orientation of fasteners during installation. For example, to assemble some barbeques, fasteners such as screws or bolts are required to be installed in a generally upward direction. This may necessitate that the consumer crouch beneath a partially assembled barbeque to install additional components or to secure assembled components. Use of tools in this position may be difficult for those who do not have dexterity with tools. Even unassisted or manual insertion and tightening of screws or bolts in this position may be difficult. Alternatively, a consumer may have to reposition a partially assembled barbeque numerous times during its assembly process if it is desired to install screws or bolts in a more convenient orientation than in a generally upward direction.
- While manufacturers often provide detailed written assembly instructions, including figures, the required orientation of some barbeque components might not be apparent to unskilled consumers. This may lead to improperly assembled barbeques. For example, the grill casting might not be adequately balanced on the support structure which could make the barbeque unstable. Other elements such as the burners, heat deflectors, and the propane tank should also be properly oriented to ensure safe operation of the barbeque.
- The above difficulties might also be faced by retailers attempting to assemble floor models for display to potential consumers. This may make retailers reluctant to assemble floor models, which could make it more difficult for the unassembled barbeques to be sold because consumers are deprived of the opportunity to see an assembled model. Similarly, if retailers assemble floor models improperly, consumers may be discouraged from purchasing the corresponding barbeque model.
- Fully assembled barbeques may alternatively be shipped by manufacturers to retailers to avoid problems associated with the assembly of the barbeque by the consumer. A potential drawback of this approach is that the fully assembled barbeque generally requires a significantly larger shipping carton and therefore occupies a greater volume when shipped. As a result, fewer barbeques may be shipped at a time leading to increased shipping costs. Manufacturers also incur increased labour costs in assembling the barbeque themselves.
- Once the barbeque is assembled, connections between two or more of the assembled components may become loosened, for example, by moving the barbeque or through regular use of the barbeque. Loosening may also be caused thermal contraction and expansion of the barbeque components when the barbeque is subject to varying weather conditions or variation in the heat output of the barbeque itself. Imperfections in the manufacture of one or more barbeque components may lead to a barbeque assembly with one or more loose connections, even when the barbeque is intially assembled. Such loosened connections may ultimately cause joined components to become separated, impacting negatively on the operation of the barbeque. For example, the connection between vertical supports and a bridging member joining the supports may loosen, causing the barbeque grill assembly to be unstable.
- Notwithstanding the extent to which components are joined to one another, the structural members of the barbeque support assembly may themselves elastically yield to a limited extent when a force is applied thereto. This yield may lead to a less rigid barbeque support structure. Indeed in an extreme situation, repeated elastic yielding of a component may lead to its failure.
- Based on the foregoing, it would be desirable to develop alternative barbeques that may be shipped unassembled to reduce costs, but that may be readily and quickly assembled by unskilled consumers. It would also be desireable to develop alternative barbeques that have added resistance to loosening of the connections between their components, and that have reduced elastic yielding of their support structure components as compared to barbeques known in the art.
- The invention consists of a barbeque grill housing support structure. According to one broad aspect of the invention, the barbeque assembly may have a first member and a second member for supporting the grill housing, and a cross member fastened between the first and second members. The first member may be oriented in an initial position relative to the cross member, and a biasing member is attached to the first member and the second member. The biasing member displaces the first member to a biased position in which the first member is displaced from the cross member relative to the initial position.
- In an illustrative embodiment of the invention, respective free ends of the first and second members are displaced from one another along an axis substantially parallel to a longitudinal axis of the cross member when the first member is biased from the initial position to the biased position.
- In a further illustrative embodiment, the biasing member is a barbeque grill housing attached between the first and second members.
- In a yet further illustrative embodiment, the support structure has a friction system adapted to support displacement of the first member in the biased position. The friction system includes a first friction member on the first member, and a second friction member on the biasing member. The first and second friction members frictionally co-operate to support the displacement of the first member in the biased position.
- In a yet further illustrative embodiment, the first friction member is a post, and the second friction member is an edge of a post hole.
- In a yet further illustrative embodiment, the first member includes a beam connection member having a portion defining a bolt hole therethrough, and the cross member has portions defining a bore therethrough for receiving a bolt. Upon placement of the bolt through the bolt hole and the bore, a friction fit may be provided between the bolt and an edge of the bore when the first member is in the biased position.
- According to another broad aspect of the invention, there is provided a barbeque grill housing support structure having a first member and a second member for supporting the grill housing, and a cross member fastened between the first and second members to orient the first member in an initial position relative to the cross member. There is also provided a fastener joining the first member and the cross member, and a biasing member attached to the first member and one of the second member and the cross member. The biasing member may be in spaced relationship with the fastener, and displacing the first member to a biased position in which the first member is displaced from the cross member.
- According to another broad aspect of the invention, there is provided a barbeque grill housing support structure, having a first member and a second member for supporting the grill housing, and a cross member fastened between the first and second members to orient the first member in an initial position relative to the cross member. The cross member is fastened to the first member, and a biasing member attached to the first member and one of the second member and the cross member maintains the first member in a biased position in which the first member is angularly displaced from the cross member relative to the initial position. This arrangement provides additional friction between the first member and the cross member.
- According to another broad aspect of the invention, there is provided a barbeque grill housing support structure having a first member and a second member for supporting the grill housing, and a cross member fastened between the first and second members to orient the first member in an initial position relative to the cross member. The cross member may be fastened to the first member. There is also provided a biasing member attached to the first member and the cross member displacing the first member to a biased position in which the first member is displaced from the cross member relative to the initial position.
- For a better understanding of the present invention and to show more clearly how it may be carried into effect, reference is now made, by way of example only and not of limitation, to the accompanying drawings in which:
- FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of the barbeque according to an illustrative embodiment of the invention;
- FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the barbeque according to an alternative illustrative embodiment of the invention;
- FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of supports and a lower casting of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the lower casting of the barbeque of FIG. 1 taken along the line4-4 of FIG. 3;
- FIG. 4A is a partial side view of an end of a bridging member of the barbeque of FIG. 1 showing an alternate welding slot;
- FIG. 4B is a partial top view of the end of the bridging member shown in FIG. 4A;
- FIG. 5 is a side view of a beam connection member of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of beam connection members and a cross beam of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 7 is an assembled perspective view of the beam connection members and cross beam of FIG. 6 showing bolts oriented for insertion;
- FIG. 7A is an exploded partial end view of a beam connection member and bolt of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 7B is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of the beam connection member of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 8 is a partial side view including the beam connection members and cross beam of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 8A is an assembled partial end view of a beam connection member and bolt of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 9 is an exploded partial perspective view including beam connection members, support members and a cross beam of the barbeque of FIG. 2;
- FIG. 10 is a partial perspective view of an alternative embodiment of the beam connection member and cross beam of the barbeque of FIG. 2;
- FIG. 11 is side view of a pin of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 12A is side view of an alternative embodiment of the pin of FIG. 11;
- FIG. 12B is an exploded partial perspective view of a beam connection member, leg extension, caster and legs of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 13A is an end view of a bolt of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 13B is a side view of a bolt of the barbeque of FIG. 13A, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 14A is an end view of an alternative embodiment of the bolt of FIG. 13A;
- FIG. 14B is a side view of the bolt of FIG. 14A, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 15 is a perspective view of a partially assembled barbeque of FIG. 2;
- FIG. 16 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of the beam connection member and tank base of FIG. 2;
- FIG. 17 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of the tank base of FIG. 16;
- FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the tank base of FIG. 17 having strengtheners;
- FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of a fuel source retainer of the barbeque of FIG. 2;
- FIG. 20 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of the fuel source retainer of FIG. 19;
- FIG. 21A is an end view of a further alternative embodiment of the fuel source retainer of FIG. 19;
- FIG. 21B is a side view of the fuel source retainer of FIG. 21A;
- FIG. 22 is a top view of an alternative embodiment of a shelf of the barbeque of FIG. 1, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 23 is an end view of the shelf of FIG. 22, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view of a receptacle the shelf of FIG. 23 taken along the line24-24;
- FIG. 25 is a side view of a shelf of the barbeque of FIG. 1, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 26 is an exploded partial perspective view of a shelf and support of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 27 is an exploded partial perspective view of a shelf and support of the barbeque of FIG. 2;
- FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of a side burner of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of a side burner of the barbeque of FIG. 2;
- FIG. 30A is an exploded perspective view of a valve clip and valve opening of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 30B is a perspective view of the valve clip and valve opening of FIG. 30A showing the valve clip inserted into the valve opening;
- FIG. 30C is a perspective view of the valve clip and valve opening of FIG. 30A showing the valve clip retained within the valve opening;
- FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the panel and leg members of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 32 is a perspective view of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of a lower casting and burner of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 34 is a side view of the lower casting and burner of FIG. 23 showing the burner attached to the lower casting;
- FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the console and leg members of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 36 is a perspective assembled view of the console and leg members of FIG. 35;
- FIG. 36A is a detailed side view of the console of FIG. 36, showing the console and the bridging member, with the leg member shown outlined and transparent;
- FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the console and leg members of the barbeque of FIG. 2;
- FIG. 38 is a perspective assembled view of the console and leg members of FIG. 37;
- FIG. 39A is a side view of a console bolt of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 39B is an end view of the bolt of FIG. 39A;
- FIG. 40 is a partial exploded perspective view of the wheel assembly of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 41 is a cross-sectional view of the wheel assembly of the barbeque of FIG. 1 taken along the line41-41 of FIG. 40;
- FIG. 42A is an exploded perspective view of a axle pin and axle lock of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 42B is an assembled perspective view of an axle pin and axle lock of FIG. 42A;
- FIG. 43A is an exploded perspective view of an axle pin and axle lock of the barbeque of FIG. 2;
- FIG. 43B is an assembled perspective view of an axle pin and axle lock of FIG. 43A;
- FIG. 44 is a partial side view of the barbeque of FIG. 2 showing an alternative fuel source retainer, and showing the beam connection member outlined and transparent;
- FIG. 45 is a partial end view of the barbeque of FIG. 2 showing the alternative fuel source retainer of FIG. 44;
- FIG. 46A is an isolated bottom view of a mounting bracket of the alternative fuel source retainer of FIG. 44;
- FIG. 46B is a side view of the mounting bracket of FIG. 46A;
- FIG. 46C is an end view of the mounting bracket of FIG. 46A;
- FIG. 47A is an isolated end view of an engaging member of the alternative fuel source retainer of FIG. 44;
- FIG. 47B is a side view of the engaging member of FIG. 47A;
- FIG. 47C is an another end view of the engaging member of FIG. 47A, viewed from a direction opposite to the end view of FIG. 47A;
- FIG. 47D is a top view of the engaging member of FIG. 47A, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 47E is a cross-sectional view of the engaging member of FIG. 47A taken along the line47E-47E of FIG. 47C;
- FIG. 47F is a cross-sectional view of the engaging member of FIG. 47A taken along the
line 47F-47F of FIG. 47C; - FIG. 47G is a perspective view of the engaging member of FIG. 47A with an elongated shim;
- FIG. 47H is another perspective view of the engaging member of FIG. 47G viewed from a direction opposite to the perspective view of FIG. 47G;
- FIG. 48A is a side view of a fuel tank retaining bolt of the barbeque of FIG. 2;
- FIG. 48B is an end view of the fuel tank retaining bolt of FIG. 48A;
- FIG. 49 is a transparent isolated side view showing the connection of a beam connection member and cross beam of the barbeque of FIG. 2;
- FIG. 50A is an end view of a wing nut of the barbeque of FIG. 2, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 50B is a side view of the wing nut of FIG. 50A, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 50C is another end view of the wing nut of FIG. 50A viewed from a direction opposite to the end view of FIG. 50A, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 51 is an isolated transparent side cutaway view showing a bolt and wing nut joining the beam connection member and cross beam of the barbeque of FIG. 2;
- FIG. 52A is an isolated end view of a burner support member of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 52B is a side view of the burner support member of FIG. 52A;
- FIG. 52C is a top view of the burner support member of FIG. 52A;
- FIG. 53A is a transparent top view of the burner tray of FIG. 28 additionally including a bracket;
- FIG. 53B is a side view of the burner tray of FIG. 53A;
- FIG. 53C is an end view of the burner tray of FIG. 53A;
- FIG. 54 is a detailed view of the burner tray of FIG. 53A identified by the
reference numeral 54 in FIG. 53C; - FIG. 55 is a detailed view of the burner tray of FIG. 53A identified by the
reference numeral 55 in FIG. 53C FIG. 55A is a top view of the shelf of FIG. 22 showing an alternative conduit of the shelf in phantom; - FIG. 55B is an isolated cross-sectional view of the conduit of the shelf of FIG. 55A taken along the
line 55B-55B; - FIG. 56 is a side view of the panel of the barbeque of FIG. 2, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 57 is an end view of a bracket of the panel FIG. 56, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 58 is an isolated perspective view of the valve clip of FIG. 29;
- FIG. 59 is another perspective view of the valve clip of FIG. 58 viewed from a direction opposite to the perspective view of FIG. 58;
- FIG. 60A is an isolated top view of a beam connection member FIG. 2;
- FIG. 60B is an end view of the beam connection member of FIG. 60A, showing hidden features in phantom;
- FIG. 60C is a side view of the beam connection member of FIG. 60A, showing hidden features in phantom;
- FIG. 60D is a cross-sectional view of the beam connection member of FIG. 60A, taken along the line60D-60D of FIG. 60A;
- FIG. 61A is an isolated side view of an alternative axle lock of the barbeque of FIG. 1, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 61B is another isolated side view of axle lock of FIG. 61A, viewed from a direction transverse to the side view of FIG. 61A, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 61C is an end view of axle lock of FIG. 61A, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 61D is a cross-sectional view of the axle lock of FIG. 61C taken along the line61D-61D.
- FIG. 61E is a cross-sectional view of the axle lock of FIG. 61B taken along the line61E-61E;
- FIG. 62A is an isolated side view of an alternative axle lock of the barbeque of FIG. 2, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 62B is another isolated side view of axle lock of FIG. 62A, viewed from a direction transverse to the side view of FIG. 62A, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 62C is an end view of axle lock of FIG. 62A, with hidden features shown in phantom;
- FIG. 62D is a cross-sectional view of the axle lock of FIG. 62C taken along the
line 62D-62D; - FIG. 62E is a cross-sectional view of the axle lock of FIG. 62B taken along the
line 62E-62E; - FIG. 63 is an isolated cross-sectional side view of a wheel and alternative axle pin of the barbeque of FIG. 1, with hidden features shown in phantom; and
- FIG. 64A is an isolated end view of a burner support member of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 64B is a top view of the burner support member of FIG. 64A;
- FIG. 64C is a side view of the burner support member of FIG. 64A;
- FIG. 65 is an isolated top view of a lower casting of the barbeque of FIG. 1, showing casting openings for receiving the burner support member of FIG. 52A;
- FIG. 66 is an isolated view of a burner support member of FIG. 52A, which includes a member for attaching it to a burner;
- FIG. 67 is an isolated transparent side view of a burner, burner support member and a portion of the lower casting defining a casting opening of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 68 is an isolated top view of the burner support member and casting portion of FIG. 67;
- FIG. 69A is a side view of the alternative axle pin of FIG. 63;
- FIG. 69B is an end view of the axle pin of FIG. 69A;
- FIG. 70A is a side view of an alternative axle pin of the barbeque of FIG. 2;
- FIG. 70B is an end view of the axle pin of FIG. 70A;
- FIG. 71A is an isolated side view of an alternative embodiment of a threaded post of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 71B is an isolated end view of the threaded post of FIG. 71A;
- FIG. 72 is an isolated side view of an alternative nut of the barbeque of FIG. 1;
- FIG. 73A is a top view of the valve clip of FIG. 29;
- FIG. 73B is an end view of the valve clip of FIG. 29;
- FIG. 73C is an side view of the valve clip of FIG. 29;
- FIG. 73D is a bottom view of the valve clip of FIG. 29;
- FIG. 73E is a cross-sectional view of the valve clip of FIG. 29, taken along the line73E-73E of FIG. 73C;
- FIG. 74 is a side view of support members and cross beam of the barbeque of FIG. 2 wherein the support members are biased towards the cross beam in an initial position;
- FIG. 75 is a side view of support members and cross beam of the barbeque of FIG.2 wherein the support members are biased away from the cross beam in an alternate initial position;
- FIG. 76 is a side view of the support members of FIG. 74 wherein a biasing member in the nature of a lower casting is positioned in preparation for moving the support members to a biased position; and
- FIG. 77 is a side view of the support members of FIG. 76 in a biased position, and being maintained in place by the lower casting.
- Referring to FIG. 1, a first illustrative embodiment of the claimed invention is shown in exploded view. The illustrative embodiment of the claimed invention includes a barbeque60 having a support structure which has first and
second support members cross beam 66 rigidly connected therebetween. A preparation or storage surface in the nature of first andsecond shelves 68′, 70′ may be included. To provide limited structural support to thesupport members accessory panel 72 may be provided. Agrill housing 74, having opposedcastings burner 80, is supported by thesupport members more grill plates 82, and awarming rack 84 may also be contained within thegrill housing 74. A fuel flow controller, forinstance console 86, may be provided to moderate the flow of fuel to theburner 80. To deflect heat produced byburners 80, a heat deflector, such asangled bars 88 may also be included. If a self-contained fuel source is used, including a fuel container, for example, such as apropane tank 90, then a fuel source orcontainer support base 92 may be employed to supporttank 90. If an external fuel source, such as piped natural gas, is used thenbase 92 may be omitted, andsupport members wheels 94 and/orcasters 96. - In the context of describing embodiments of the claimed invention, variations of detail are disclosed, a number of which are shown, for example, in FIG. 2. While one such variation is described in conjunction with another particular variation, yet other variations may generally be used in association as well. The description provided is therefore not intended to be limited to the particular combination of variations disclosed.
- Support Member
-
Support member 62 may be configured to be substantially identical to supportmember 64, and may have a mirror configuration to support 64. In the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 2,support members support member 64 is provided with a fuelsource support base 92. Except for the description ofsupport base 92, the description ofsupport member 62 generally applies to supportmember 64, unless otherwise noted. -
Support member 62 has twoleg members leg members leg members legs leg members leg members 98′ and 100′ having a generally square cross-section with one inch sides, as is shown in FIG. 2. - Referring to FIGS. 3 and 4,
leg members member 102. Bridgingmember 102 may be connected toleg members member 102 has one, and preferably two,slots Slots member 102 and are positioned to receive a weld therethrough for attachingleg members member 102. To conserve weld material, the width ofslots - Referring to Figure to FIGS. 4A and 4B, an alternate weld slot such as
slot 106 a may be used to strengthen the weld formed between bridgingmember 102 andleg 98. In comparison to the location ofslot 106, slot 106 a is rotated about its centroid so that the weld material applied throughslot 106 a attaches toleg 98 at both sides of a longitudinal centerline ofleg 98, whereasslot 106 directs the weld material to an orientation that is substantially parallel to a longitudinal centerline ofleg 98. The rotation ofslot 106 a is preferably approximately 10 degrees. An abutting member or saddle having protrusions orwings 115 for abuttingleg 98 may be added to, or integrally formed with, bridgingmember 102 so that bridgingmember 102 is closer toleg 98 adjacent the location of a weld.Wings 115 may also facilitate the positioning ofleg 98 relative to slot 106 a before a weld is applied.Wings 115 are preferably stamped, embossed or otherwise integrally formed with bridgingmember 102 so that they protrude from bridgingmember 102 to abut and conform to a portion of the periphery ofleg 98. As shown in FIG. 4B,wings 115 may have an arcuate cross section which conforms to a portion ofleg 98. - In an alternative configuration (not shown), a weld may be applied to both sides of a longitudinal centerline of
leg 98 to attach bridgingmember 102 thereto by including two substantially parallel slots in bridgingmember 102, instead of one slot such asslot 106 a. The two slots are preferably oriented adjacent one another and are generally parallel to a longitudinal centerline ofleg 98. Bridgingmember 102 may then be welded toleg 98 through each slot. - By joining
leg members member 102, a substantially rigid structure is created, withleg members member 102 may be generally perpendicular toleg members legs leg members wheels 94,casters 74,leg extensions 114 or other terminating elements as are known to those skilled in the art. - For stability,
leg members grill housing 74. It will be appreciated by those versed in the art that a wider spacing for theleg members leg members larger housing 74 may be appropriate, and may provide greater stability to barbeque 60 than if a spacing approximating the width of the narrower grill housing was used. - While
support members leg members grill housing 74 and other components of the barbeque 60. Components herein described as being attached or connected betweenleg members support members leg members - Cross Beam
- A cross member, in the nature of
cross beam 66, joinsfirst support member 62 tosecond support member 64 to form a substantially rigid structure for supportinggrill housing 74, and other components of the barbeque 60. For stability,cross beam 66 may be of a length which is approximately the same as that of thegrill housing 74. For example,cross beam 66 may be approximately 18 inches long. This ensures thatsupport members housing 74 generally below and approximately aligned with opposite sides of thegrill housing 74. -
Cross beam 66 may have a uniform lateral cross-section that is generally rectangular in shape, for example, having two respective opposed sides of three-inch width and two respective opposed sides of four inch width, or sides all having a similar width such as 2½ inches. Alternatively,beam 66 may have a cross-sectional configuration which is polygonal, round, or non-uniform in shape. To reduce costs and material, thebeam 66 may be hollow. A rigid plastic, or a metal, whether formed by injection moulding, extrusion, bending, or some other appropriate process, is preferably used to constructcross beam 66. - While
cross beam 66 is generally linear in the illustrative embodiment of the invention, it may have angles or curves formed therein for orienting thebeam 66 for attachment to eachsupport member alternative cross beam 66′ used in an embodiment of the invention. - Beam Connection Member
- Referring additionally to FIGS. 5, 6,7, 7A, 8 and 8A, a
beam connection member 116, having astrut 118 with abeam receptacle 120 defined therein, connectsbeam 66 to supportmember 62. A secondbeam connection member 122, having abeam receptacle 124, connectsbeam 66 to supportmember 64.Beam connection members beam connection member 122, may be configured to have a fuelsource support base 92 for supporting a fuel container such as apropane tank 90, as described below. If apropane tank 90 is not used in conjunction with barbeque 60, for example if a natural gas feed is used, thenbeam connection members source support base 92, the following description ofbeam receptacle 120, applies tobeam receptacle 124 as well, unless otherwise indicated. -
Beam receptacle 120 has anopen end 126 for receiving anend 128 ofcross beam 66.Beam receptacle 120 may also have aclosed end 130 which is opposed to openend 126 preventscross beam 66 from being inserted into thereceptacle 120 any further.Closed end 130 also provides feedback by way of abutment ofcross beam 66 there against to indicate thatbeam 66 is fully inserted, and ready to be secured. In addition toclosed end 130,beam receptacle 120 haswalls 132 that, in conjunction withclosed end 130, definereceptacle 120 as substantially the same shape, and at least the same size asend 128 ofcross beam 66. If abeam 66 with a round or curved lateral cross-section (not shown) is used, then receptacle 120 may have one continuous wall. The difference between the size ofreceptacle 120, as defined bywalls 132 and end 130, and crossbeam end 128, is preferably configured to be at a minimum to reduce movement ofend 128 withinbeam receptacle 120. -
Beam connection member 116 may be made from a metal, plastic or other suitable material known to those in this art. If made from a plastic, it may be integrally formed by injection moulding or extrusion. - Referring to FIGS. 2 and 9, an alternative embodiment of
beam connection member 116′ is formed as astrut 118′ having a generally inverted U-shaped cross-section. Strut 118′ may be attached between leg members, such asleg members 98′ and 100′; as described below. Arms 136 (whose lower longitudinal edge is shown in a phantom line) and 138 of the U-shaped cross-section are preferably substantially at right angles to base 140 of the U-shaped cross-section. Strut 118′ is preferably attached betweenleg members 98′ and 100′ adjacent leg member base ends 110′ and 112′. When attached betweenleg members 98′ and 100′,arms 136 and 138 may be generally parallel to the longitudinal axes of the leg members, and the U-shaped cross section preferably opens in the general direction of leg member base ends 110′ and 112′ (FIG. 2). -
Arm 138 may have anopening 142 formed therein for receivingbeam end 128′. Opening 142 preferably is substantially the same size as a lateral cross-section ofbeam end 128′ so as to mate therewith. To facilitate placement ofbeam end 128′ intoopening 142, opening 142 may correspond to the general shape of just three sides ofbeam end 128′, to define a generally right-angledU-shaped opening 142. -
Cross beam 66′ may be attached to strut 118′ by first insertingbeam end 128′ intoopening 142 untilbeam end 128′ abuts arm 136 ofstrut 118′. Arm 136 ofstrut 118′ may additionally have a supporting member attached thereto for supportingbeam end 128′. The supporting member may be in the form of a substantiallyperpendicular flange 144 along a free end 146 (shown as a phantom line) of arm 136, theflange 144 being generally directed towardsopening 142. Beam end 128′ may rest onflange 144 once beam end 128′ abuts arm 136. When fully inserted intoopening 142, movement ofbeam end 128′ is inhibited by arm 136,flange 144 of arm 136,base 140 ofstrut 118′ and edges ofopening 142. Atransverse indent 148 inbase 140 betweenarm 138 andopening 142 may also receive and align a portion ofbeam end 128′. Furthermore, opening 142 may additionally have a flange such as a peripheral flange (not shown) for abuttingcross beam 66′. - To abut a greater portion of
beam end 128′,base 140 ofstrut 118′ may be widened at a mid-section 150 ofstrut 118′.Mid-section 150 may widened in a direction generally away from arm 136 or away fromarm 138, or in both directions. Whilestrut 118′ maintains its U-shaped cross-section in this configuration,arms 136 and 138 are closer to one another at theends 152 ofstrut 118′ and become gradually further apart to a maximum whenadjacent mid-section 150. Ifmid-section 150 is widened in a direction away fromarm 138 only,beam connection member 116′ then projects from the plane oflegs support member 62′ having ashelf 68″ and abeam connection member 116′ to occupy a smaller volume when placed in a container such as a shipping box (not shown) than ifmid-section 150 projected in an opposite direction. - Beam end128′ may be attached to strut 118′ using at least one fastener, such as a
bolt 154, which is inserted through ahole 156 inbase 140 and acorresponding bore 158 inbeam end 128′. Whenbeam end 128′ is inserted intoopening 142 to abut arm 136,hole 156 and bore 158 are preferably aligned to receivebolt 154.Hole 156 and bore 158 are aligned and may be generally vertically oriented to permit insertion ofbolt 154 in a downward direction. This arrangement permitsbolt 154 to rest within bothhole 154 and bore 158, while also, to a limited extent, securingbase 140 to beam end 128′. Oncebolt 154 is inserted through bothhole 154 and bore 158, it may be secured with a manually securable bolt retainer such as awing nut 160 or some other manually tightenable fastener. - In the context of this description the terms “unassisted”, “manual”, “manually”, “by hand”, or other similar terms, indicate that the component or components described may be installed, attached or otherwise arranged without assistance of any mechanical advantage, including the use of tools or other implement. However, while unassisted installation of a component is preferred, it is not necessary. An appropriate tool or tools may optionally be used.
- As best seen in FIG. 49,
bolt 154 may have a widenedhead 157 for abutting a greater portion ofbeam connection member 116′. By contacting a greater portion ofbeam connection member 116′, movement of installedbolt 154 may be further inhibited, which in turn may reduce movement of retainedcross beam 66′ relative tobeam connection member 116′. - Rotational movement of
bolt 154 may be limited by aportion 159 of abolt shaft 161 defining a non-rotatable shape.Shaft portion 159 may be locatedadjacent head 157. At least hole 156 (see also FIG. 9) may be configured to have substantially the same shape as defined by a periphery ofshaft portion 159 to permitshaft portion 159 to be located therein. Becauseshaft portion 159 is non-rotatable, and may be located within similarlysized hole 156,shaft 161 may be inhibited from rotating, for example, whennut 160 is threaded and tightened thereon. This may permit additional unassisted or manual tightening ofnut 160 to bolt 154 to further inhibit movement of connectedbeam end 128′ relative tobeam connection member 116′. In an illustrative embodiment,shaft portion 159 has a substantially rectangular cross section andhole 156 is similarly configured to be generally rectangular in shape. - Referring to FIGS.50A-50C,
nut 160 is shown withwings 163 extending in a direction generally perpendicular tonut body 165. Increased leverage for turningnut 160 may be obtained by anglingwings 163 away from a central axis of nut 160 (not shown). -
Nut 160 may additionally include anub 167 for gripping sides of acorresponding rebate 169 inbeam end 128′.Nub 167 protrudes fromnut body 165 in a direction substantially opposite to the direction of the protrusion ofwings 163, and may be tapered, being wideradjacent nut body 165. Rebate 169 may be similarly tapered but marginally smaller thannub 167. Asnut 160 is threaded ontobolt shaft 161,nub 167 entersrebate 169. Becauserebate 169 is marginally smaller thannub 167, and bothrebate 169 andnub 167 are similarly tapered, friction betweennub 167 and sides ofrebate 169 gradually increases. Oncenub 167 is tightened withinrebate 169, loosening ofnut 160, for example due to movement of barbeque 40, may be inhibited.Tapered rebate 169 may also guidenub 167 into position asnut 160 is tightened. -
Beam connection member 116′ is preferably made from a single sheet of metal, which may be cut and then bent to define the elements described above.Beam connection member 116′ may alternatively be made of plastic or other suitable material, as known to those skilled in this art. - Referring to FIG. 10, a further alternative
beam connection member 116″, preferably made of metal, has twowalls 132″ protruding substantially perpendicular to astrut 118″ ofbeam connection member 116″.Walls 132″ are respectively preferably located to abut top and bottom opposite sides ofend 128″ ofcross beam 66″, as shown in FIG. 10. Thewalls 132″ may respectively alternatively be oriented (not shown) to abut opposite sides ofcross beam end 128″ other than the said top and bottom opposite sides. - Each
wall 132″ has at least one hole 162 passing therethrough for receiving a fastener such as bolt 164. Holes 162 have collinear axes and align with a bore 166 (shown in phantom lines) incross beam end 128″. When wall holes 162 and bore 166 are aligned, bolt 164 may be inserted therethrough and manually secured at a free end using a wing nut 168 or some other manually tightenable fastener. Before bolt 164 is inserted, wall holes 162 and bore 166 are aligned and preferably generally vertically oriented to permit insertion of bolt 164 in a downward direction. This arrangement permits bolt 164 to rest within holes 162 and bore 166, while partially securingwalls 132″ to beam end 128′. Wing nut 168 may then be conveniently attached and tightened causingwalls 132″ to urge againstbeam end 128″. -
Beam connection member 116″ may be constructed from a single generally planar sheet of metal having two bends formed therein to definewalls 132″ andstrut portion 118″. Thebeam connection member 116″ may then be welded to leg members such asleg members - Attachment of Beam Connection Member to Leg Members
-
Beam connection member 116, may be rigidly attached to at least one, and preferably both, of theleg members beam connection member 116 is attached to bothleg members connection member 116 may provide structural support to supportmember 62. Strut 118 ofbeam connection member 116 spansleg members leg members ends 152 which may have portions defining twoconduits 170. Eachconduit 170 may be attached to, or be integral with, the respective ends 170 ofstrut 118.Strut 118, bridgingmember 102 andlegs - To attach
strut 118 toleg members leg member respective conduit 170. Theconduits 170 preferably have a lateral cross-section substantially equal to or larger than the size and shape of the lateral cross-section of therespective leg members conduits 170. If the cross-sections of theconduits 170 andleg members conduit 170 andleg member strut 118, the axes ofconduits 170, are moved along the longitudinal axis of theleg members -
Conduits 170 may be secured toleg members conduit 170 has ahole 174 passing laterally therethrough for receiving apin 172.Hole 174 has anentry 174 a and an exit 174 b. Similarly, eachleg member hole 176, passing laterally therethrough for receivingpin 172.Hole 176 has an entry 176 a and an exit 176 b. To installpin 172, therespective entries 174 a, 176 a and exits 174 b, 176 b are aligned. Thepin 172 may then be inserted therein to hinder movement of theconduit 170 relative toleg member -
Pin 172 preferably has ahead 178, which is larger thanentry 174 a to inhibit movement ofpin 172 along its longitudinal axis within theholes Pin 172 may also have acatch 180 to inhibit longitudinal movement of thepin 172 within theholes insertion end 182 of thepin 172.End 182 is located opposite tohead 178. Catch 180 may be marginally larger than exit hole 176 b to inhibitpin 172 from being removed onceend 182 is fully inserted therethrough. To facilitate passage ofcatch 180 through marginally smaller exit hole 176 b, end 182 may be tapered. An annular rebate 184 may also be provided inpin 172. The annular rebate 184 is located adjacent to catch 180, and receives a portion of the boundary of marginally smaller exit hole 176 b. - Referring to FIG. 12A, an alternative fastener, such as slotted
pin 186, may be used to attachstrut 118 toleg members pin 172, slottedpin 186 is installed. Slottedpin 186 however has a slightly different configuration thanpin 172. Slottedpin 186 preferably has ahead 188, which is larger thanentry 174 a to inhibit movement ofpin 186 along its longitudinal axis within theholes Pin 186 may also have acatch 189 to inhibit longitudinal movement ofpin 186 within theholes insertion end 190 ofpin 186.End 190 is located opposite tohead 188. Catch 186 may be marginally larger than exit hole 176 b to inhibitpin 186 from being removed onceend 190 is fully inserted therethrough. To facilitate passage ofcatch 189 through marginally smaller exit hole 174 b, end 190 may be tapered. To further facilitate passage ofcatch 186, end 190 may have at least one and preferably three partiallytransverse slots 192 emanating from a central longitudinal axis ofpin 186. Eachslot 192 is preferably uniformly angularly displaced from the other. Asend 190 is inserted through the marginally smaller exit hole 174 b,slots 192permit end 190 to narrow, facilitating passage ofcatch 186, therethrough. Slottedpin 186 may be made of a resilient material such as a plastic so thatend 190 returns to its original shape once it passes through exit hole 174 b to enablecatch 189 to inhibit removal ofpin 186. - Yet further alternative means may be employed to secure
strut 118 toleg members conduit 170 may be removed to form a yoke (not shown). The yoke may be snapped onto aleg member insertion end 182 ofpin 178 may have a lateral hole therethrough for receiving a retaining clip or cotter pin (not shown) which further inhibits movement ofpin 178 along its longitudinal axis. - Referring again to FIG. 9, if
beam connection member 116 is made of metal, for example as described above asbeam connection member 116′,strut portion 118′ may be secured to theleg members legs members square leg members strut 118′ may have concave rebates 194, instead of havingconduits 170. Concave rebates 194 may be arcuate and have substantially the same radius asleg members leg members 98′ and 100′. As long as theleg member 98′, 100′ is wider than the distance betweenedges 196 of the arcuate rebate 194, strut 118′ may be welded toleg members 98′, 100′ along edges 196. - In the various embodiments,
strut portion 118 is preferably attached so that it is substantially perpendicular tolegs Walls 132 ofbeam receptacle 120 are preferably oriented so that the receivedcross beam 66 is substantially perpendicular to bothstrut 118 andlegs - Referring to FIG. 7B, in an alternative embodiment,
beam connection members beam connection member 197. Unitarybeam connection member 197 does not havebeam receptacles cross beam 66 included. Instead, thebeam connection members 116 a and 122 a of eachsupport member portion 199 therebetween. To reduce the size of the combined beam connection members, for example for shipping, the joining portion may be bifurcated (not shown). The bifurcation is preferably located equidistant from eachconnection member 116 a and 122 a. As with other parts of the barbeque 60, the bifurcated joining portion may be assembled using connectors such as threaded receptacles and bolts that may preferably be manually installed. Alternatively, the free ends of the bifurcated joining portion may be configured to have a releasable snap fit or friction fit to permit unassisted joining and separation of the connection members. - Beam Securing Apparatus
- Referring again to FIGS. 5, 6,7, 7A, 8, and 8A, and to FIGS. 13A and 13B, a
beam securing apparatus 198 ofbeam connection member 116 securesbeam 66 withinreceptacle 120.Beam connection member 122 may have a similar configuration tobeam connection member 116, and is discussed in greater detail below. - The
beam securing apparatus 198 includes a fastener for attachingreceptacle 120 tobeam 66. The fastener may be a manually installable fastener, such as bolt 200 (FIG. 13A and 13B) that may be installed and tightened by hand.Bolt 200 may additionally be loosened and removed by hand. Thebeam securing apparatus 198 also includes an opening or passage, in the nature of ahole 202 defined in one ofwalls 132 and passing therethrough. Ashaft 201 ofbolt 200 having a threadedend 204 may be inserted throughhole 202, and may be received by a bolt retainer in the nature of a corresponding bore of thebeam securing apparatus 198, which may be abushing 206, fixed in thecross beam 66. Bushing 206 preferably has internal threads 207 for threaded engagement with the threadedend 204.Hole 202 is smaller than ahead 208 ofbolt 200 to inhibithead 208 from passing throughhole 202. As a result, when anend 128 ofcross beam 66 is inserted intoreceptacle 120, it may be secured to awall 132 ofreceptacle 120 bybolt 200, inserted throughhole 202, intobushing 206, and tightened by hand. In the illustrative embodiment, at least one of thewalls 132 is anattachment wall 210, and thehole 202 passes throughattachment wall 210. While thehole 202 is located in awall 210,additional holes 202 may be located inother walls 132 to receiveadditional screws 96. Similarly, more than onehole 202 may be included in thesame wall 132. - To further secure an
end 128 ofcross beam 66, thebeam securing apparatus 198 may include a protrusion in the nature of a raisedcollar 212 which may be used to limit movement ofbolt 200 once thebolt 200 is tightened. Thecollar 212 is co-axial withhole 202, and protrudes away from the inside 214 ofreceptacle 120. -
Head 208 ofbolt 200 has a generallyannular void 216 for matingly receivingcollar 212.Void 216 is coaxial with threadedend 204 ofbolt 200, and is open adjacent the point of attachment 218 of threadedend 204 and screwhead 208.Void 216 has aninternal surface 220 defining a shape that is congruent to and substantially the same size ascollar 212. The shape ofvoid 216 need not be uniform, nor does it have to correspond precisely to the shape ofcollar 212. The shape ofvoid 216 andcollar 212 need only be sufficiently similar to permit threadedend 204 ofbolt 200 to be inserted through thehole 202, into threadedbushing 206, and tightened to causecollar 212 to entervoid 216 and to come into sufficient contact with portions ofinternal surface 220 to inhibit movement of thebolt 200. Ifvoid 216 is slightly smaller thancollar 212 then a friction fit may be formed betweeninternal surface 220 andcollar 212. Ifvoid 216 is made to be too small, or if it is a substantially different shape thancollar 212, thencollar 212 may be inhibited from enteringvoid 216 and bolt 200 may not be turned and threaded, or it may only be partially threaded, intobushing 206, which is undesirable. -
Beam securing apparatus 198 may also include aslot 224 located inattachment wall 210 to facilitate increasing the friction betweenreceptacle walls 132 andbeam end 128. Asslot 224 is narrowed, the internal perimeter ofreceptacle 120, as defined bywalls 132, decreases, causing thewalls 132 to grip thebeam end 128. This gripping may reduce movement ofreceptacle 120 relative tobeam 66, and, by connection, movement ofsupport member 62 relative tobeam 66. - Slot224 passes through
collar 212 andadjacent attachment wall 210 to createcollar pieces 212 a and 212 b, and adjacent wall portions 210 a and 210 b.Slot 224 may be oriented substantially perpendicular to the internal perimeter of thereceptacle 120 as defined bywalls 132. Whileslot 224 may pass throughcollar 212 at a chord, it preferably bisects thecollar 212 into two substantiallyequal pieces 212 a and 212 b. To facilitate movement ofcollar pieces 212 a and 212 b relative to one another, so thatbeam end 128 may be gripped,slot 224 preferably extends to an edge ofreceptacle 120 adjacentopen end 126. Movement ofcollar pieces 212 a and 212 b may be further facilitated by increasing the length ofslot 224. Increasing the width of theslot 224 between adjacent portions 210 a and 210 b may also facilitate movement ofcollar pieces 212 a and 212 b. For example, slot 224 may be lengthened and widenedadjacent collar pieces 212 a and 212 b to form awindow 226 inattachment wall 210. Thewindow 226 may be generally rectangular, having one inch and three inch sides. Other sizes and shapes created by lengthening and/or wideningslot 224 may facilitate varying degrees of relative movement ofcollar pieces 212 a and 212 b. - As
collar pieces 212 a and 212 b are moved closer to one another to a proximate position,slot 224 becomes narrower, and adjacent wall portions 210 a and 210 b move closer to one another to reduce the overall length L ofadjacent wall 210. This shortening ofwall 210 reduces the overall internal perimeter of thereceptacle 120 defined by thewalls 132.Receptacle 120 preferably initially has substantially the same perimeter asbeam end 128. This enables a marginal reduction in the receptacle's perimeter to cause thewalls 132 to grip thebeam end 128. To keepcollar pieces 212 a and 212 b proximate to one another,bolt 200 is installed while maintaining the position ofpieces 212 a and 212 b. Asbolt 200 is tightened,proximate collar pieces 212 a and 212 benter void 216. The shape ofvoid 216 is preferably similar to the combined shape ofproximate collar pieces 212 a and 212 b. Oncebolt 200 is installed, it limits the movement ofcollar pieces 212 a and 212 b. This arrangement maintains the grip ofreceptacle walls 132 onbeam end 128. -
Bolt 200 andcollar pieces 212 a and 212 b may be configured to causebeam end 128 to be progressively clamped asbolt 200 is tightened. This may be achieved by configuring theannular void 216 of thebolt 200 to be narrower at a closed end 228 ofvoid 216, and to be progressively wider at anopen end 230 ofvoid 216.Annular void 216 has an outercircumferential surface 222 a and an inner circumferential surface 222 b. In the illustrative embodiment outercircumferential surface 222 a is angled, at 10 degrees for example, relative to the axis of threadedend 204. As a result,outer surface 222 a is further from threadedend 204 atopen end 230 of the void than it is at closed end 228. In the illustrative embodiment, the diameter of outercircumferential surface 222 a is approximately one inch adjacentopen end 230. Inner circumferential surface 222 b may be angled in a direction opposite to that ofsurface 222 a, or it may be parallel to the axis of threadedend 204. Due to the orientation ofsurfaces 222 a and 222 b, void 216 tapers to closed end 228. - When
collar pieces 212 a and 212 b are positioned together to formcollar 212, they are preferably configured to be substantially the same size and shape, and preferably marginally larger than,annular void 216. Accordingly,collar pieces 212 a and 212 b have outer circumferential surface portions 232 a and 232 b. Whencollar pieces 212 a and 212 b are positioned apart, free ends 234 a and 234 b of therespective collar pieces 212 a and 212 b are preferably positioned for engagement byopen end 230 ofvoid 216. This permits free ends 234 a and 234 b to be inserted intovoid 216 as threadedend 204 ofbolt 200 is inserted intohole 202. - As
bolt 200 is tightened, the outercircumferential surface 222 a ofvoid 216 and the corresponding outer circumferential surface portions 232 a, 232 b ofcollar pieces 212 a and 212 b gradually come into sliding contact with one another. Slot 224 permitscollar pieces 212 a and 212 b to move closer to one another as force is exerted on thepieces 212 a, 212 b by outercircumferential surface 222 a. This force is caused by the tightening of thebolt 200 moving thescrew head 208 closer to thecollar pieces 212 a, 212 b. As thepieces 212 a and 212 b are forced to move closer to one another, thewalls 132 ofreceptacle 120grip beam end 128 with increasing force, as described above.Bolt 200 may be manually tightened to the point thatcollar pieces 212 a and 212 b are at least partially retained byvoid 216. This arrangement permits thecross beam end 128 to be gripped bywalls 132 forming a substantially rigid connection betweencross beam 66 andsupport member 62, without the need for tools. Furthermore, the connection may be made using onebolt 200 at eachend 128 ofcross beam 66. Becausecollar pieces 212 a and 212 b together are marginally larger thanvoid 216, a tight fit is formed between thescrew head 208 andcollar pieces 212 a, 212 b to inhibit loosening ofbolt 200. - In the illustrative embodiment,
slot 224 may be wider at slot portion 236 a which is adjacentopen end 126 ofreceptacle 120. As wall portions 210 a and 210 b are forced closer together by the tightening ofbolt 200, a narrow portion 236 b ofslot 224 may become closed beforebolt 200 is fully installed, while wide portion 236 a is just narrowed. As installation ofbolt 200 continues, the force exerted bybolt 200 oncollar pieces 212 a, 212 b is increased. This forces slot wide portion 236 a to narrow further, reducing the internal perimeter of thereceptacle 120, as defined bywalls 132, and causing thewalls 132 increase their grip onbeam end 128 adjacent to receptacleopen end 126. In the illustrative embodiment, slot wide portion 236 a may be 0.10 inches across, and slot narrow portion 236 b may be 0.06 inches across. - In an alternative embodiment, the
outer surface 222 a ofvoid 216 may be configured to define other shapes such as a concave or convex taper (not shown) or some other, preferably uniform, shape that permits thebolt 200 to be installed while at the same time forcingcollar pieces 212 a and 212 b closer to one another so thatbeam end 128 may be gripped. - Similarly, the configuration of
void 216 and the corresponding configuration ofcollar pieces 212 a, 212 b may be varied to achieve the same effect as described above. For example, while it is preferable thatouter surface 222 a defines void 216 which tapers to closed end 228, the shape of the taper may vary.Surface 222 a may taper linearly, or it may follow a somewhat uniform curve, such as a parabolic, or higher order, function. Outercircumferential surface 222 a may also be non-uniform as long as it generally tapers sufficiently to engage and force correspondingly configuredcollar pieces 212 a, 212 b together. - It is not necessary that
collar pieces 212 a and 212 b be continuous. Portions of thecollar pieces 212 a and 212 b may be removed to leave a number of smaller protrusions (not shown). Provided that sufficient portions of thecollar 212 remain to engage, without significant deformation, theouter surface 222 a ofscrew void 216, a substantially equivalent function as described above may be achieved. For example, instead of a collar, a plurality of posts may be provided (not shown), with at least one post on either side ofslot 224, and with each post positioned for sliding engagement with outercircumferential surface 222 a. - To permit the described movement of
collar pieces 212 a and 212 b so thatbeam end 128 may be gripped as thebolt 200 is tightened,walls 132 definingreceptacle 120 may be made of a bendable material, and are preferably made of a resilient material. An appropriate plastic or metal, for example, may be used. - The
head 208 ofbolt 200 may be graspable, having, for example, external grips, such as knurls (not shown), cross hatches (not shown), or ridges 238, to provide greater friction to facilitate unassisted installation ofbolt 200. In the illustrative embodiment, thehead 208 is cylindrical, having a diameter of about 1.5 inches and a thickness of about 0.625 inches, or some other size and shape suitable for manual manipulation. The threadedend 204 protrudes substantially co-axially with the axis of thehead 208. A plurality ridges 238, each being substantially parallel to the axis of the threadedend 204, may be located about the circumference of thecylindrical head 208. Turning of thebolt 200 about its longitudinal axis may also be improved by using a non-circular or non-uniform shaped head (not shown) with the threadedend 204 preferably protruding fromhead 208 along an axis passing through a centroid ofhead 208. -
Head 208 may be made of any rigid material, such as nylon, plastic or a metal. If constructed from a plastic,bolt 200 may be integrally moulded withhead 208. Referring to FIGS. 14A and 14B, provide an alternative connection between the threadedend 204 andhead 208, the threadedend 204 may be part of abolt 240 having abolt head 242. To receive threadedend 204,screw head 208 may be provided with abore 243 therethrough which is coaxial with the rotational axis of thescrew head 208. Arebate 244 may be added to a side of thehead 208 opposite to void 216.Rebate 244 is centered aboutbore 243, and is substantially the same shape but marginally smaller thanbolt head 242.Bolt 200 is assembled by inserting threadedend 204 intorebate 244 and throughbore 243. Becauserebate 244 is marginally smaller thanbolt head 242, force must be applied to thebolt head 242 in the direction of the threadedend 204, to pressfit head 242 intorebate 244. A bolt having a non-rotatable bolt head, such as a ¼-20 hex bolt, is preferably used to increase rotational resistance betweenscrew head 208 andbolt head 242 withinrebate 244. - Fuel Source Support
- Referring to FIG. 7,
beam connection member 122 may be similar in configuration tobeam connection member 116, except that, in the illustrative embodiment,beam connection member 122, may be configured to have an integral fuelsource support base 92 for supporting a self contained fuel source, such as a propane tank 90 (shown in FIG. 1). Other aspects ofbeam connection member 122, such as thebeam securing apparatus 198 described above, are configured and operate in substantially the same manner as described forbeam connection member 116. However, the relative positioning ofreceptacle 124 andconduits 170 for securingbeam connection member 122 toleg members base 92. In addition to supporting a fuel source,base 92 additionally performs a function analogous to strut 118 ofbeam connection member 116 in joiningconduits 170 and havingbeam receptacle 124 defined therein. -
Beam connection member 122 is preferably moulded to have a fuelsource support base 92, which substantially conforms to the shape of at least abase rim 246 of apropane tank 90. A standard domestic use “20 pound” propane tank such as part number G20-28 manufactured by Wolfdale Engineering Ltd. of Brampton, Ontario, may be used to determine the dimensions ofsupport base 92.Base rim 246 is received by a corresponding receptacle in the nature of abase rim cavity 248 defined insupport base 92. Becausebase rim cavity 248 conforms to the shape ofbase rim 246, tipping or other movement oftank 90 is hindered by thesupport base 92. A void 250 may be located incavity 248 to save material and to provide drainage for thecavity 248. - Tipping may be further reduced by increasing the dimensions of
support base 92 to conform to a greater portion of thetank 90. For example,support base 92 may have an abutment including portions defining a receptacle in the nature of alower tank cavity 252 that conforms to a continuous portion of the lower part oftank 90 that is adjacent tobase rim 246.Tank cavity 252 does not need to encompass the entire circumference oftank 90. While complete circumferential support may be used to further reduce possible movement oftank 90, it may also make it more difficult to placetank 90 withinbase 92. For similar reasons, the portions ofbase 92 which definetank cavity 252 are preferably locatedadjacent beam receptacle 124.Tank 90 may then be placed intobase 92 by first approaching a side ofbase 92 opposite to receptacle 124 to avoid encounteringcross beam 66 and the portions defininglower tank cavity 252.Base 92 is preferably moulded from plastic but may moulded from metal as well. - Referring to FIGS. 9, 15 and60A-60D, to reduce costs, an alternative
beam connection member 122′, which is similar in configuration tobeam connection member 116′, may be used. As withbeam connection member 122,beam connection member 122′, may have an integral fuelsource support base 92′. -
Beam connection member 122′ is formed as astrut 254 having a generally U-shaped cross-section, and may be attached between leg members, such asleg members arms Arm 256 andarm 258 of the U-shaped cross-section are preferably substantially at right angles tobase 260.Strut 254 is preferably attached betweenleg members leg members arms - Having a configuration similar to
arm 138 ofbeam connection member 116′,arm 258 may have anopening 262 formed therein for receivingbeam end 128′. Opening 262 preferably is congruent to and substantially the same size as a lateral cross-section ofbeam end 128′. To facilitate placement ofbeam end 128′ intoopening 262, opening 262 may correspond to the general shape of just three sides ofbeam end 128, to define a generally right-angledU-shaped opening 262. -
Cross beam 66′ may be attached to strut 254 by first insertingbeam end 128′ intoopening 262 untilbeam end 128′ abutsarm 256 ofstrut 254.Arm 256 ofstrut 254 may additionally have a supporting member attached thereto for supportingbeam end 128′. The supporting member may be in the form of a substantiallyperpendicular flange 264 along afree edge 266 ofarm 256,flange 264 being generally directed towardsopening 262. Beam end 128′ may rest onflange 264 once beam end 128′ abutsarm 256. - Referring in particular to FIGS.60A-60D, to further inhibit movement of
beam end 128′ when inserted intoopening 262, one ormore projections 267, extending frombase 260,abut beam end 128′.Projections 267 may be added tobase 260 or they may be stamped from the same material asbase 260, creatingholes 269, as shown in FIG. 60A. When fully inserted intoopening 262,beam end 128′ is inhibited byarm 256,flange 264 ofarm 256,base 260 ofstrut 254,projections 267 and edges ofopening 262. Opening 262 may additionally have a flange such as a peripheral flange (not shown) for abuttingcross beam 66. - To abut a greater portion of
beam end 128′,base 260 ofstrut 254 may be widened at a mid-section 268 ofstrut 254.Mid-section 268 may widened in a direction generally away fromarm 256 or away fromarm 258, or in both directions. Whilestrut 254 maintains its U-shaped cross-section in this configuration,arms ends 270 ofstrut 254 and become gradually further apart to a maximum whenadjacent mid-section 268. Ifmid-section 268 is widened in a direction away fromarm 258 only,beam connection member 122′ then projects from the plane oflegs shelf 70. This may enable a support member such assupport member 64 having ashelf 70 and abeam connection member 122′ to occupy a smaller volume when placed in a container such as a shipping box (not shown) than ifmid-section 268 projected in an opposite direction. - The widening of
mid-section 268 is preferably sufficient to permit abase rim cavity 248′ for receiving at least a portion of atank base rim 246 to be defined inmid-section 268. To reduce the amount of material used, mid-section 268 may be configured to permit abase rim cavity 248′ which receives a segment, for example half, of thebase rim 246 ofpropane tank 90. Ifbase rim cavity 248′ is defined to receive a segment ofbase rim 246, thecavity 248′ is partially defined by anarcuate wall 272 having a similar radius tobase rim 246.Arcuate wall 272 may be curved in the general direction ofopening 262, or it may curve in some other direction, such as away from opening 262. - Similarly, to save materials, the dimensions of a tank cavity analogous to
tank cavity 252 may be reduced so that it encompasses a smaller portion of tank 90 (not shown). Alternatively, the tank cavity may be eliminated, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 15. - As a result of the reduction or elimination of
tank cavity 252, the central axes ofopenings non-linear cross beam 66′ having a curve or bends 274 and 276 therein orients beam ends 92′ for insertion intoopenings beam connection members 116′ and 122′. - Beam end128′ may be attached to strut 254 using at least one fastener, such as
bolt 278, which is inserted through ahole 280 inbase 260 and acorresponding bore 282 inbeam end 128′.Hole 280 is preferably located to pass through portions ofbase 260 definingbase rim cavity 248′. Whenbeam end 128′ is inserted intoopening 262 and abutsarm 256,hole 280 and bore 282 are preferably aligned to receivebolt 278. Oncebolt 278 is inserted therethrough, it may be manually secured with awing nut 284 or some other manually tightenable fastener. Beforebolt 278 is inserted,hole 280 and bore 282 are aligned and preferably generally vertically oriented to permit insertion ofbolt 278 in a downward direction. This arrangement permitsbolt 278 to rest withinhole 280 and bore 282, while partially securingbeam connection member 122′ to beam end 128′.Wing nut 284 may then be conveniently attached and tightened. - Referring to FIGS. 48A, 48B and51, in a manner similar to that described above for
bolt 154, rotational movement ofbolt 278 may be inhibited by aportion 285 ofbolt shaft 289 defining a non-round shape.Shaft portion 285 may be locatedadjacent bolt head 367. At least hole 280 (shown in FIG. 9) may be configured to have substantially the same cross-sectional shape as defined by a periphery ofshaft portion 285 to permitshaft portion 285 to be located therein. Becauseshaft portion 285 is non-round, and may be located within a similarlysized hole 280,shaft 289 may be inhibited from rotating, for example, whennut 284 is threaded and tightened thereon. This may permit additional manual tightening ofnut 284 to bolt 278 to further inhibit movement of connectedbeam end 128′ relative tobeam connection member 122′. -
Nut 284 may be configured in a similar manner as described fornut 160, and it may likewise co-operate with acorresponding rebate 291, in a similar manner thatnut 160 cooperates withrebate 169 to form a friction fit whennut 284 is threaded ontoshaft 289. - Referring to FIG. 16, an alternative configuration for supporting a
tank 90 is shown. In the illustrated configuration, a beam connection member 286 having substantially the same structure asbeam connection member 116″ is attached betweenlegs connection member 116″. Beam connection member 286 differs fromconnection member 116″ in that it has an arcuate portion 288 having generally the same radius astank 90. Whentank 90 is supported by astrut 290 spanninglegs tank 90 in the direction of beam connection member 286 may be inhibited. Movement oftank 90 may additionally be inhibited by one or more of the embodiments of a fuel source retainer described below. To further inhibit movement oftank 90,strut 290 may have abase rim cavity 248″ which conforms to and receives at least a portion of atank base rim 246, and preferably the full circumference ofbase rim 246. - Referring to FIG. 17, an alternative embodiment of a tank support base which is separate from beam connection member286 is shown. In this embodiment,
tank support base 92″ may be made from injection moulded plastic having a similar form asbase 92, or it may be made of wire as shown in FIG. 17.Tank support base 92″ may also be pivotally attached tolegs leg member support base 92″. Aligned holes 296 are preferably generally located at either end of the longitudinal axis ofbase 92″. Ifwheels 94 are added to barbeque 60, posts 296 may be extensions of the wheel axle pins described below. Pivotal attachment ofbase 92″ permits base 92″ to be angled to receivetank base rim 246. This may make it easier to placetank 90 intobase 92″. Oncetank base rim 246 is placed withinbase 92″, both base 92″ andtank 90 may be rotated to a generally upright position. Movement oftank 90 may then be limited by beam connection member 286 and by adding a fuel source retainer, described below. -
Base 92″ may also have a base rim collar 298 for receivingtank base rim 246. For added support,base 92″ may have one or more sections 300 (see FIG. 18) which conform to a portion oftank 90 to resist movement oftank 90 and to strengthen collar 298. Sections 300 may be located adjacent posts 294 to limit movement oftank 90 in a direction along the pivotal axis ofbase 92″. Referring again to FIG. 17, additional retention oftank 90 may be achieved by addition of a tank support 302 which extends from and substantially normal to base rim collar 298, and is positioned to abut a side oftank 90 whentank 90 is placed inbase 92″. - Fuel Source Retainer
- Referring to FIG. 1, for increased retention of
tank 90 withinsupport base 92, a fuel source retainer such astank wire 304 may be added tobase 92.Tank wire 304 may have anarcuate portion 306 that substantially conforms to a portion of the circumference oftank 90, such astank body 292, to provide lateral support totank 90 in a direction generally opposite to the support provided by portions oftank cavity 252adjacent beam receptacle 124.Tank wire 304 may be attached tobase 92 with two tank wire supports 308 formed at ends 310 oftank wire 304. Tank wire supports 308 may be oriented substantially normal to the planearcuate portion 306 and may be inserted in tankwire retaining holes 312 located adjacent toconduits 170. - Referring to FIGS. 15 and 19, an alternative fuel source retainer such as a
collar 314 may be used to inhibit movement oftank 90.Collar 314 has two substantially identicalcurved wire members 318. Eachwire member 318 has acurved portion 320 having a generally uniform radius which is preferably less than the radius oftank body 292 but greater than the radius of a standardvalve protecting sleeve 316 attached totank 90. A mountingportion 322 is formed at an end ofwire member 318. Mountingportion 322 may be linear and substantially perpendicular tosemi-circular portion 320. The remaining end ofwire member 318 may have aloop 324 defining a generally circular opening, the centroid of which is located on a line co-axial with a longitudinal axis of mountingportion 322. When the respective mountingportions 322 of eachwire member 318 are inserted through therespective loops 324 of theother wire member 318, andsemi-circular portions 320 are oriented to lie in substantially the same plane, acircular opening 326 is formed by the twosemi-circular members 320.Collar 314 may be attached to supportmember 64 so that thecollar 314 spans, and is preferably centered, betweenlegs portion 322 may be attached to arespective leg member clip 328 wherein each mountingportion 322 is inserted into arespective mounting hole 330 in each mountingclip 328 for rotational movement therein. Each mountingclip 328 is attached to aleg member - The mounting clips328 are substantially identical to one another and may be mirror configurations of one another. The description of one mounting
clip 328 therefore substantially applies to the other. Mountingclip 328 conforms to a portion ofleg member leg member clip 328 preferably encompasses greater than half of the circumference of a portion of the leg member so that the leg is retained byclip 328. Similarly, ifleg member clip 328 preferably encompasses at least two sides and at least part of both a third side and a fourth side of a portion of the leg member. Mountingclip 328 may be likewise configured to accommodate leg members having other cross sections. Mountingclip 328 preferably conforms to the attachedleg member clip 328 is held in place by friction at the interface between the mountingclip 328 and theleg member clip 328 by sliding it longitudinally alongleg member - To retain
fuel tank 90, mountingclips 328 ofcollar 314 may be slidingly moved alongleg members adjacent shelf 70. This positioning provides clearance fortank 90 to be placed withinbase 92. Oncetank 90 is placed intobase 92, mountingclips 328 ofcollar 314 are slidingly moved alonglegs tank 90,valve sleeve 316 passes throughcollar opening 326, andcurved members 320 may abut ashoulder portion 332 oftank 90. Any lateral movement oftank 90 withinbase 92 causescollar 314 to come into contact withvalve sleeve 316 thus inhibiting further lateral movement oftank 90. To replacetank 90, onecurved member 320 may be rotated toward and overvalve sleeve 316 to permit removal oftank 90. - Mounting
clips 328 may be attached to eachleg member ends clip 328 to increase the linear distance between them. This permits passage of aleg member clips 328 are preferably made of a generally resilient material, such as a plastic, when a force is no longer applied, theends portions 322 of eachcurved wire member 318 may then be inserted into the respective mounting holes 330. In the illustrative embodiment, at least thecurved wire member 318 is sufficiently resilient to permit mounting ends 322 to be moved axially closer to one another as they are aligned with their respective mounting holes 330. Once aligned, the resilientcurved portions 320 encourage the respective mountingmembers 322 to enter the mounting holes 330. -
Curved portions 320 ofcollar 314 may alternatively have radii marginally larger than the radius oftank body 292. In this configuration (not shown)curved portions 320 are aligned withbody 292 and combine to surroundtank body 292 to inhibit lateral movement thereof. - Referring to FIG. 20, a yet further alternative fuel source retainer such as a
collar 314′ may be used to inhibit movement oftank 90.Collar 314′ may include a single piece of wire having a curved, and preferably semi-circular,portion 320′ formed therein to define two mountingportions 322′. The configuration of bothcurved portion 320′ and mountingportions 322′ is substantially the same as described forcurved wire member 318 and mountingportion 322 of the embodiment described above.Collar 314′ is attached to mountingclips 328, and permits the installation, retention and removal of atank 90 in a similar manner as described above forcollar 314. - Referring to FIGS. 21A and 21B,
curved portion 320″ may be additionally configured to capture an edge ofvalve protecting sleeve 316. For example,curved portion 320″ may have aclip 338 formed therein for engaging a portion ofsleeve 316. In order to engagesleeve 316 the radius ofcurved portion 320″ is preferably substantially the same assleeve 316 so thatclip 338 may be aligned withsleeve 316. - In a yet further alternative embodiment (not shown), mounting
clips 328 may be eliminated and the mounting portions of the various embodiments, forexample mounting portions 322, may be inserted directly into mounting holes located in eachleg member - Referring to FIGS.44 to 47F, an alternate
fuel source retainer 341 is shown. Unlike the above-described fuel source retainers,retainer 341 may depend from bridgingmember 104 and engagevalve protecting sleeve 316 to inhibit movement oftank 90 when placed on a support such asbeam connection member 122′, havingbase rim cavity 248′.Retainer 341 may be used in conjunction with other supports such as fuelsource support base 92. In the present description,retainer 341 will be described in the context of atank 90 supported bybeam connection member 122′. - As illustrated in FIGS. 44 and 45,
retainer 341 includes a mounting member in the nature of mountingbracket 343 and an engagingmember 345. Mountingbracket 343 and engagingmember 345 abut opposite sides oftank collar 316 to inhibit movement ofcollar 316 and, by connection,tank 90.Bracket 343 may be secured at an end to another component of barbeque 60 so that movement ofbracket 343 is minimized. For example,bracket 343 may be attached to bridgingmember 104. Ifbracket 343 is attached to bridgingmember 104 it may be welded or otherwise connected to aflange 602 thereof. Whilebracket 343 may be attached to a side offlange 602, it may also be attached to an edge offlange 602. - In an illustrative configuration,
bracket 343 may be generally L-shaped, having afirst arm 347 for attachment to flange 602 and asecond arm 349 which, when installed, projects away from bridgingmember 104 so that it mayabut tank collar 316 whentank 90 is placed inbase rim cavity 248′. One or more protrusions in the nature oflongitudinal flanges bracket 343.Flanges bracket 343 so that they are positioned to contacttank collar 316. This configuration encourages at least two points of contact betweenbracket 343 andtank collar 316. Ifflanges bracket 343 andtank collar 316. In addition to, or instead of,flanges bracket 343 could have a generally arcuate shape (not shown) to conform toarcuate tank collar 316. In any embodiment,bracket 343 is preferably constructed of a substantially rigid material such as a metal, and may additionally be strengthened by forming alongitudinal indent 351 therein. - Referring in particular to FIGS.46A-47F, engaging
member 345 co-operates withbracket 343 to engage and retaintank collar 316 therebetween. Engagingmember 345 includes at least oneslot 353, and preferably a pair ofslots 353, which receiveedges 355 of anopening 357 inbracket 343. Opening 357 may be oriented generally co-axially with a longitudinal axis ofsecond arm 349, withedges 355 running generally parallel to the longitudinal axis.Slots 353 are preferably parallel to one another, and may slidingly engageedges 355 to permit movement of engagingmember 345 alongedges 355 from an engaged position (see FIGS. 44 and 45), wheretank collar 316 is retained, to a disengaged position (not shown) wheretank collar 316 is not retained.Slots 353 may define in engaging member 345 ahead portion 361 and abody portion 363, having astem 365 therebetween. To reduce play incollar 316, when retained byfuel source retainer 341,body 363 may be curved to correspond to the curvature ofcollar 316.Head 361 preferably has a shape that is generally similar to, but smaller than, that ofopening 357, andslots 353 run generally transverse to a longitudinal axis ofhead 361. This configuration permitshead 361 to be inserted intoopening 357. Further insertion may be inhibited by configuringbody 363 to be larger than opening 357. As engagingmember 345 is rotated aboutstem 365, withhead 361 inserted inopening 357,edges 355enter slots 353. When engagingmember 345 is rotated in this manner by approximately 90 degrees, portions ofedges 355 are retained withinslots 353, inhibiting movement of engagingmember 345 in a direction transverse to opening 357, but permitting sliding movement along a longitudinal axis ofopening 357. Sliding movementpermits engaging member 345 to be moved from an engaged position to a disengaged position. To facilitate this sliding movement,slots 353 preferably have a width that is at least the same as the combined thickness of mountingbracket 343 andtank collar 316. This permitscollar 316 to be retained, havingbody 363 on one side and mountingbracket 343 on the other. However, this width ofslot 353 may permit play between engagingmember 345 and mountingbracket 343. Addition of ashim 373, projecting intoslot 353 to narrow at least a portion ofslot 353, may reduce this play. FIGS. 47G and 47H show engagingmember 345 with anelongated shim 373′ which may further reduce play in engagingmember 345. - Engaging
member 345 may additionally be provided with a protrusion in the nature of atab 359 for grasping and moving engagingmember 345 between engaged and disengaged positions.Tab 359 preferably projects from a side ofbody 363, and may have a generally arcuate shape to facilitate grasping and moving ofbody 363 by hand. - Engaging
member 345 is preferably moulded from a plastic, and may include ahole 375 to encourage cooling during the moulding process. - To retain
tank collar 316,tank 90 is first placed ontobeam connection member 122′, but held withcollar 316 tilted away fromfuel source retainer 341. Engagingmember 345 may then be moved to a disengaged position to permit placement ofcollar 316 adjacent or abutting mountingbracket 343. Oncetank 90 is tilted towardfuel source retainer 341 to locatecollar 316 adjacent or abutting mountingbracket 343, engagingmember 345 may be slid into an engaged position by graspingtab 359 and moving the engagingmember 345 to retaincollar 316. - Referring to FIG. 44, movement of
tank 90 may be further inhibited by usingbolt 278 as a fuel tank retaining bolt to retaintank rim 246 withincavity 248′. To retaintank rim 246, ahead 367 ofbolt 278 may be located adjacentarcuate wall 272 with substantially the thickness of tank rim 246 therebetween. In this configuration, lateral movement oftank rim 246 when placed betweenhead 367 andarcuate wall 272, may be inhibited byarcuate wall 272 andbolt head 367. Ifbolt head 367 is tapered, being narrower at itsfree end 369, a generally V-shapedopening 371 is formed betweenhead 367 andarcuate wall 272. As tank rim 246 is placed betweenhead 367 andarcuate wall 272, it may be guided into position by the narrowing V-shape. - Shelves
- Referring to FIGS. 22, 23 and24, barbeque 60 may have a
shelf 68 or two shelves (second shelf not shown) to provide asurface 339 which may be used for food preparation, or for supporting items such as cooking utensils.Shelves 68 may be configured identically, or configured as a mirror image of one another. - In the illustrative embodiment, the second shelf has a configuration that mirrors
shelf 68. The description ofshelf 68 that follows therefore substantially applies to the second shelf, as well.Shelf 68 includes abody 333 having a generallyplanar surface 339.Body 333 may be supported by at least one arm in the nature of ashelf supporting portion 340.Shelf supporting portion 340 may be formed fromleg member 98, and a secondshelf supporting portion 342 may be formed fromleg member 100.Legs portions shelf 68. In the illustrative embodiment, each supportingportion Shelf 68 may be secured to each of the supportingportions respective leg members shelf retainers receptacles free end 352 and 354 of supportingportions shelf retainers receptacle shelf 68. In the illustrative embodiment,receptacles shelf 68. Becauseshelf retainers shelf retainer 344, which attaches supportingportion 340 toshelf 68, will be described. - To attach
shelf 68 to supportingportion 340,free end 352 of supportingportion 340 may be inserted intoreceptacle 348 in a direction ofinsertion D. Receptacle 348 preferably has a cross-section which, when taken lateral to direction of insertion D, is substantially equal to or larger than the size and shape of the lateral cross-section of supportingportion 340. The relatively larger cross-sectionpermits supporting portion 340 to be inserted into thereceptacle 348. If the cross-section of thereceptacle 348 and corresponding supportingportion 340 is substantially the same size, then a friction fit may be formed betweenreceptacle 348 and corresponding supportingportion 340. While generally maintaining its lateral cross-sectional shape and size,receptacle 348 may also be elongated to receive a greater portion offree end 352. - Referring additionally to FIG. 24, to secure supporting
portion 340 withinreceptacle 348,receptacle 348 may be provided with a shelf retainer such as a protrusion in the shape of aramp 356 located withinreceptacle 348.Ramp 356 generally increases along the direction of insertion D. A corresponding hole or void 358 (shown in FIG. 25) located in supportingportion 340, receivesramp 356 to inhibit movement ofshelf 68 relative to supportingportion 340.Ramp 356 is installed as follows. When insertingfree end 352 intoreceptacle 348,free end 352 encounters abase 360 of asloping side 362 oframp 356.Ramp 356 is preferably made of a resilient material such as a plastic to permit it to deform before enteringvoid 358. Asfree end 352 is forced alongramp 356,ramp 356 deforms to permit passage offree end 352 intoreceptacle 348. When void 358 of supportingportion 340 is positioned to correspond with the location oframp 356,resilient ramp 356 extends therein. Removal offree end 352 in an opposite direction is inhibited by asheer side 364 oframp 356 which abuts an edge ofvoid 358. Further insertion offree end 352 intoreceptacle 348 is prevented by a stop such astab 366 attached toshelf 68. Alternatively,receptacle 348 may have a closed end (not shown) for preventing further insertion offree end 352. In either configuration, when assemblingshelf 68 and supportingportion 340, the stop provides feedback that thefree end 352 is fully inserted and assembly of the two parts is complete. -
Shelf retainer 344 may additionally have aconduit 368, which is similar in configuration toreceptacle 348 and has an axis which is collinear to the axis ofreceptacle 348.Conduit 368 differs fromreceptacle 348 in at least that it does not have a stop, such astab 366. This permitsfree end 352 to be inserted throughconduit 368 in the general direction of insertion D so that it may be subsequently inserted intoreceptacle 348.Conduit 368 thus generally guidesfree end 352 towardreceptacle 348. Oncefree end 352 is received byreceptacle 348,conduit 368 inhibits the movement of supportingportion 340 relative toshelf 68.Conduit 368 may be attached to, or be formed integrally with (for example, by moulding),shelf 68. - In the illustrative embodiment,
conduit 368 may have a slot which separatesconduit 368 into two conduit portions 368 a and 368 b. Conduit portions 368 a and 368 b are preferably the same size but may be unequal. By using conduit portions 368 a and 368 b instead of a contiguous conduit, the conduit portions 368 a and 368 b may have greater flexibility at their free ends to facilitate insertion offree end 352 and passage of supportingportion 340. - Referring to FIGS. 55A and 55B,
conduit 368 alternatively may be generally J-shaped. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 55A,conduit 368 may be displaced fromreceptacle 348 by a greater distance than is shown in FIG. 22. This increased spacing may provide greater resistance to a release of anattached leg member 98 fromconduit 368 whenshelf 68 is in an operative position and a generally downward force is applied to afree end 377 ofshelf 68. Alternatively, to provide a greater area of contact for retention of supportingportion 340,conduit 368 may be lengthened to meetreceptacle 348 to form a single continuous passage (not shown). -
Shelf 68 could alternatively be attached to supportingportions shelf supporting portions legs member 62. - In the illustrative embodiment,
shelf 68 is made of moulded plastic but could be made from some other material such as steel. Ifshelf 68 is made of plastic, then strengtheningribs 220 may be added to increase the rigidity ofshelf 68, potentially reducing the amount of material required tomould shelf 68. - Referring to FIGS. 25 and 26, in an alternative embodiment of
shelf 68, labelled 68′, either a portion or the entirety ofshelf surface 339′ may be manually removable. This removable portion, or member, 370 may be removed to be used as a tray, to be cleaned, for example in a dishwasher, or it may be put to some other use appropriate for such a member having a substantially flat an rigid surface. A suitable weather resistant material such as plastic, porcelain, steel, ceramic, wood or a combination thereof may be used to constructremovable member 370.Removable member 370 may also have a ridge (not shown) about the perimeter of itssurface 339′, and a drain (not shown) to permit removal of a liquid such as rain water by gravity. - To accommodate
removable member 370,shelf 68′ may have a generallyU-shaped shelf frame 372. Aninner perimeter 374 ofshelf frame 372 substantially conforms to a portion of the periphery of removable member to preferably form a friction fit therebetween.Removable member 370 may alternatively or additionally be fastened to frame 372 with a fastener (not shown), or held in place by gravity. Whileframe 372 may define a closed opening, for example a four-sided opening, the partial removal of a portion offrame 372, such as a fourth side of a rectangular frame, permits anedge 376 ofremovable member 370 to be grasped for removal and installation. Movement ofremovable member 370 in the direction of the open end ofU-shaped frame 372 may be inhibited bytabs arms U-shaped frame 372.Tabs frame 372 andremovable member 370. In an alternative embodiment (not shown), the periphery ofremovable member 370 may be bevelled or provided with a rib (not shown) for engagement with a corresponding feature of theframe 372 to permit a snap fit therebetween. Other variations to the configuration of the interface betweenframe 372 andremovable member 370 may be defined to retainmember 370 withinframe 372 while permitting unassisted installation and removal ofmember 370 therein.Removable member 370 may be any generally planar shape suitable for use as a tray as long asframe 372 is configured to receive that particular shape. - When installed,
removable member 370 is supported byreceptacles corresponding conduits 368′ and 390′.Receptacle 350′ andconduit 368′ may be configured as described for the illustrative embodiment, or they may be formed together as acontinuous channel member 392′ for slidingly receiving and frictionally retaining supportingportion 340 ofleg member 98. A secondcontinuous channel member 394′, having a substantially similar configuration aschannel member 392′, is provided for retaining supportingportion 342 ofleg member 100. Becausechannel members 392′ and 394′ are similar, a description ofchannel member 394′ will be provided. This description applies equally tochannel member 392′ with necessary modifications for receiving supportingportion 340. -
Channel member 394′ may be attached toarm 388 ofU-shaped shelf frame 372 along aclosed side 396 of thechannel member 394′.Channel member 394′ may alternatively be integrally formed withshelf frame 372. Aramp 356′, which has a configuration that is similar to ramp 356 and which operates in a similar manner, is provided along an interior surface 398 ofconduit 390′ for enteringvoid 358 to retain supportingportion 342. The procedure required to manually attachshelf frame 372 to supportingportions shelf 68 to supportingportions frame 372,channel member 392′ performs a similar function to that ofconduits receptacles Bends 400 and 402 ofU-shaped frame 372 may be used as stops to prevent further insertion of supportingportions tab 366, or closing an end ofchannel member 392′. -
Channel member 392′ may have a generally circular or rectangular cross-section for frictionally receiving and retaining supporting portions having a variety of cross-sections. For example, ifchannel member 392′ has a generally rectangular cross-section, it may receive and retain supporting members having cross-sections of a similar size and shape. An advantage of some cross-sectional shapes is that they may accommodate supporting members having different cross-sections as long as there is sufficient frictional contact between the supporting members and the inner surface of the channel. A channel having a generally square cross-section, for example, may also receive and retain a supporting member having a circular cross-section with a diameter that is substantially the same magnitude as the length of the sides of the channel's square cross-section. In this configuration, the circular supporting member contacts the inner surface of the conduit along lines defining the mid-points of the channel's sides, and is retained by the channel. In combination with the various configurations of channel and support member, ramp 356′ serves to further retain the support member within the channel. - Referring to FIG. 27, in a yet further alternative embodiment of
shelf 68, labelled 68″, a fastener in the nature of at least twobolts 404 andwing nuts 406 may be used to attachshelf 68″ to supportingportions Shelf 68″ has at least oneslat 408 for spanning the distance between supportingportions Slats 408 may be bolted directly to supportingportions bolts 404 inserted throughslat holes 410 and throughholes 412 in supportingportions bolts 404 are secured by wing nuts 406.Slats 408 may also be retained by ashelf bracket 414 at eachslat end 416. Eachshelf bracket 414 is substantially identical to the other. The description of one therefore applies to the other. -
Shelf bracket 414 retains and secures slat ends 416 to a supporting portion, such as supportingportion 340. Theshelf bracket 414 has a narrow body with alongitudinal bend 418 therein to form toarms bend 418 substantially normal to one another. One of the arms, such asarm 420, may have protrusions, such asflanges 424 to inhibit lateral movement of slat ends 416.Flanges 424 may be generally normal to botharms bracket 414. Movement ofslats 408 may also be inhibited by additional protrusions (not shown) extending from eitherarm 420 orarm 422, which additional protrusions are located to abutslats 408 that are not adjacent the ends ofbracket 414. These additional protrusions may also be used to evenly spaceslats 408 from one another. The other arm,arm 422, has at least one, and preferably twoholes 426, there through for receiving abolt 404. -
Shelf 68″ may be installed by placingslats 408 onsupport portions 340′ and 342′ so that eachend 416 of eachslat 408 is supported by one ofsupport portions 340′ and 342′. Eachbracket 414 is placed over the slat ends 416 with slat ends 416 located betweenflanges 424.Holes 426 ofarm 422 are then aligned with both thehole 410 in theadjacent slat 408 andhole 412 in the associatedsupport portion Bolt 404 may then be inserted through the threeholes wing nut 406. Oncebracket 414 is installed, lateral movement of slat ends 416 is inhibited by protrusions such asflanges 424. - Lifting or otherwise moving barbeque60 may be facilitated by providing a handle hole 428 (shown in FIG. 22) defined in
shelf 68 for grippingshelf 68.Shelf 68 may also have an indentation defining acup holder 430. Similarly, at least oneutensil rebate 432 for holding utensils (not shown), may be provided along an edge ofshelf 68. A handle hole (not shown), cup holder (not shown) and utensil rebate (labelled 432′ onshelf 68′ and 432″ onshelf 68′) may also be added toshelves 68′ or 68″. - Side Burner
- Referring to FIG. 28, one or both of the shelves may be substituted with a side burner434. Side burner 434 may have a
burner frame member 436 which has substantially the same configuration asshelf frame 372, and aburner apparatus 438 which may include aburner tray 440 having a similar configuration toremovable member 370.Burner tray 440 may also be installed and retained withinburner frame 436 in a manner similar to that described forremovable member 370. Similarly,burner frame 436 may be installed and retained in substantially the same manner as described forshelf frame 372. - In the illustrative embodiment,
burner frame member 436 is generally L-shaped having just onearm 386′ which has a configuration similar toarm 386 ofshelf frame 372. In place of a second arm,burner frame 436 has aflange 444 for receiving a fastener such as bolt 446 forfastening burner frame 436 toburner tray 440. - Referring additionally to FIG. 54, to inhibit movement of
burner tray 440 relative toburner frame 436, at least one fastener in the nature abolt 442 may be inserted through a hole such ashole 443 inchannel member 392′ and into an aligned threadedbore 445 inburner tray 440. As described,flange 444 may also be used forfastening burner frame 436 toburner tray 440. The combinedburner tray 440 andframe 436 may then be attached toshelf supporting portion 340 in the manner described above, namely by insertingshelf supporting portion 340 intochannel member 392′. While a head 447 ofbolt 442 may protrude into the channel defined bychannel member 392′, it is preferably located or otherwise configured to clear supportingportion 340. Referring to FIG. 53A, a projection in the nature of astop 449 may be locatedadjacent channel member 392′ to inhibit further insertion of supportingportion 340 therein. -
Burner tray 440 has aburner pan 448 in which a standard burner, such asburner 450 may reside. For example, a burner manufactured by Lincoln Brass Works of Waynesboro, Tenn. may be used.Burner pan 448 may be formed from the same piece of material asburner tray 440 to form one integral piece. For example,burner pan 448 andtray 440 may be stamped from a single piece of sheet metal. As shown in FIG. 29, a variation ofburner pan 448, labelled 448′, is illustrated.Burner pan 448′ may be manufactured as a separate part that rests within a burner pan opening (not shown) and that is supported by aperipheral flange 452. - Referring to FIGS.53A-55,
burner tray 440, may additionally include an abutting member in the nature of aburner tray bracket 453 for attachingtray 440 to a leg member, such as cylindrical leg member 100 (attachment to legshelf supporting portion 342 is shown in FIG. 55).Burner tray bracket 453 abutsshelf supporting portion 342 to inhibit movement ofburner tray 440 relative to supportingportion 342. -
Burner tray bracket 453 may be integrally formed withburner tray 440, and may project fromtray 440 to abutshelf supporting portion 342. Whilebracket 453 may tangentially abut cylindricalshelf supporting portion 342, if a shelf supporting portion having a non-rounded profile is employed, such asshelf supporting portion 342′, thenbracket 453 may abut the supporting portion substantially flush, along a corresponding surface thereof (not shown). - A fastener, including a nut and bolt, or a bolt having a serrated neck (not shown) which is similar to bolt612″, may be used to connect
burner tray bracket 453 toshelf supporting portion 342. The bolt may be inserted through ahole 455 inbracket 453, and into a corresponding pair of alignedholes shelf supporting portion 342. Once inserted, the bolt may be secured by a manually tightenable retainer, such as a wing nut. If a shelf supporting portion having a non-rounded profile is employed, such asshelf supporting portion 342′, then the fastener may be inserted through ahole 463 inbracket 453, and a corresponding hole in supportingportion 342′, which is located to align with hole 463 (not shown). -
Burner tray bracket 453 may include an additional member, in the nature of anangled flange 461, which may be configured to tangentially abutshelf supporting portion 342 to further inhibit movement ofburner tray 436. Even ifbracket 453 is not attached to supportingportion 342 using a fastener,flange 461 serves to inhibit removal oftray 448 from supportingportion 342 in at least a direction generally transverse to the plane oftray 448. - Referring again to FIG. 28,
burner 450 has aburner element 454 that is attached to afuel conduit 456.Burner element 454 may have a fastener in the nature of a threadedpost 458 attached thereto. Threadedpost 458 may be inserted through apost hole 460 inburner pan 448 and manually secured using a wing nut 462 or some other manually tightenable fastener.Fuel conduit 456 extends through aconduit hole 464 inpan 448 and may receive in its input end 466 afuel output conduit 468 of aburner valve 470.Conduit hole 464 is preferably smaller thanelement 454 to inhibit passage ofelement 454 therethrough. Proper placement ofconduit 456 withinconduit hole 464 may be facilitated both by threadedpost 458 and posthole 460, and by anarcuate rebate 472 at an edge ofconduit hole 464 which mayabut conduit 456.Arcuate rebate 472 preferably conforms to a portion offuel conduit 456 and may have substantially the same radius ofconduit 456. Anoptional spider guard 474 may be included at input end 466 to inhibit entry of spiders and other insects therein. - A
burner grill 476 may be locatedadjacent burner element 454, and is preferably located to receive heat fromburner 450 whenburner 450 is operational.Burner grill 476 may have a protrusion such as aleg 478 to inhibit movement ofburner grill 476 relative toburner tray 440. In the illustrative embodiment,burner grill 476 has fourlegs 478 which may be received by fourleg holes 480 inburner tray 440. Whenlegs 478 are inserted intoleg holes 480, lateral movement ofburner grill 476 is limited. At least one, and preferably two, ofburner legs 478 have acurved end 482. Curved ends 482 are first inserted into respective leg holes 480 withburner grill 476 oriented substantially perpendicular toburner tray 440. Once curved ends 482 are inserted,burner grill 476 may be rotated about curved ends 482, which reside in leg holes 480, to a position generally parallel toburner tray 440. The remaininglegs 478 may then be inserted intoleg holes 480 in the manner described above. In this configuration movement of burner grill relative toburner tray 440 may be further inhibited. -
Burner valve 470 may be inserted into valve opening 484 from a side of burner tray opposite to that ofburner pan 448, and may be attached toburner tray 440 with a valve mounting apparatus, such asvalve clip 486.Valve opening 484 may be generally circular and may have one or more engaging members in the nature offins 488 which extend intovalve opening 484.Fins 488 are preferably identical in shape and are located in a plane parallel to that ofburner tray 440. Eachfin 488 extends from an opposite side ofvalve opening 484 towards the other, and has acurved portion 490 which abuts and is connected to a corresponding portion of awall 492 ofvalve opening 484. Afree end 494 of eachfin 488 is substantially linear and defines a generallystraight edge 496. Free ends 494 may be parallel to each other. - Referring additionally to FIGS.30A-30C, 58, 59 and 73A-73E,
valve clip 486 includes abody 487 which may have a planar portion havingcurved ends 500 and generally linearparallel sides 502 which together define a shape which is substantially the same as valve clip opening 484 defined in part byfins 488.Planar portion 498 also has an opening, such as valve stem opening 504, passing therethrough. Valve stem opening 504 permits insertion of avalve stem 506 ofburner valve 470. -
Valve clip 486 may be attached to a standard burner valve, such asburner valve 470, which is manufactured by Lincoln Brass Works of Waynesboro, Tenn. Becausevalve clip 486 is preferably attached toburner valve 470 by a manufacturer, it may be fastened toburner valve 470 usingscrews 508 inserted throughbores 509 ofvalve clip 486. Manually tightenable fasteners may also be used (not shown). The bores may additionally pass through posts 510 ofvalve clip 486. Posts 510 are preferably of a length to ensure that valve stem projects through valve stem opening 504 a sufficient distance to engage a valve knob 512 onceburner valve 470 is attached toburner tray 440. Valve knob 512 facilitates turning ofvalve post 506 about its axis to control fuel flow throughburner valve 470. - Once
burner valve 470 is attached tovalve clip 486, theplanar portion 498 ofvalve clip 486 may be inserted throughvalve clip opening 484, as shown progressively in FIGS. 30A and 30B. Further insertion ofvalve clip 486 may be inhibited by at least one, and preferably two, tabs 514, wherein each tab 514 extends from alinear edge 502 ofvalve clip 486. Tabs 514 may lie in a plane parallel to, but displaced from, the plane of thesurface 516planar member 498. Oncevalve clip 486 is inserted into valve clip opening 484 to the point that it is inhibited from further insertion by tabs 514, it may be rotated about its central axis by preferably 90 degrees (as shown in FIG. 30C). This rotation aligns thecurved portions 490 offins 488 and the curved ends 500 ofvalve clip 486 to inhibit removal ofvalve clip 486 fromvalve clip opening 484. -
Valve clip 486 may be additionally configured to retainfins 488. Curved ends 500 ofplanar member 498 may be provided with aslot 518 which bisects the curved ends 500 to form two parallel wings or curved ends 500 a and 500 b for retainingfins 488. In this configuration,planar member 498 is installed by insertion intovalve clip opening 496, as shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B. Tabs 514 extend from each linear side 502 b to permit only curved end 500 a to pass throughvalve clip opening 484. In this position,slots 518 are aligned withstraight edges 496 offins 488. Rotation ofvalve clip 486 by 90 degrees causesedges 496 offins 488 to enterrespective slots 518. Oncefins 488enter slots 518, curved ends 500 a and 500 b retainrespective fins 488 therebetween (as shown in FIG. 30C). If one or bothslots 518 is narrowed to substantially the same thickness asfins 488,fins 488 may be frictionally retained therein. - To
secure valve clip 486 withinvalve clip opening 484, tabs 514, which are preferably coplanar with linear sides 502 b, may be provided with a retainer such as a protrusion in the shape of aramp 520.Ramp 520 generally increases opposite to the direction of rotation R and projects into the plane ofslot 518. Whenvalve clip 486 is inserted intovalve clip opening 484,ramps 520abut fins 488. Asvalve clip 486 is forced marginally further intovalve clip opening 484, tabs 514 deflect away from the plane ofslot 518. This deflection permits rotation ofvalve clip 486 andfins 488 may enterslot 518. Oncevalve clip 486 is rotated 90 degrees, tabs 514, and ramps 520, enter valve clip opening 484 toclear fins 488 and return to their original position, as is best shown in FIG. 30C. Further rotation ofvalve clip 486 is inhibited bysheer side 522 of eachramp 520 which abutsstraight edge 496 offin 488. This inhibited rotation provides feedback thatvalve clip 486 is installed. Tabs 514 are preferably made of a resilient material such as a plastic to enable them to resiliently return to their initial positions after being deflected during installation. The thickness of each tab 514 may be reduced to facilitate temporary deflection of tab 514 from its initial position. Onceburner valve 470 is installed,burner knob 524 may be attached tovalve stem 506, andconduit 456 may be oriented to causevalve output 468 to be inserted into conduit input end 466.Valve clip 486 may be removed by manually deflecting tabs 514, for example by finger pressure, and concurrently rotatingvalve clip 486 in a direction opposite to direction D. - To permit a snug fit between
valve clip 486 andfins 488, an apex 526 (shown in phantom in FIG. 30C) ofslot 518 which is co-planar withslot 518, has acurved portion 528 and atangent portion 530. Whenvalve clip 486 is fully installed, as described above,tangent portion 530 abuts finstraight edge 496 to inhibit transverse movement ofvalve 470 relative to finstraight edge 496.Tangent portion 530 originates at alinear edge 502 ofvalve clip 486 and merges withcurved portion 528 which gradually curves toward valve stem opening 504 and terminates at an oppositelinear edge 502 ofvalve clip 486 adjacent tab 514. Whenvalve clip 486 is installed,curved portion 528 first meets finstraight edge 496, and asvalve clip 486 is rotated,curved portion 528 guidestangent portion 530 into alignment with finlinear edge 496. Oncetangent portion 530 andlinear edge 496 are aligned, ramped tabs 514clear fin 488 and snap into place. To further facilitate alignment offin 488 withslot 518, curved edges 500 a and 500 b may be rounded in a direction generally normal to the plane of the curves of curved edges 500 a and 500 b. - While the illustrative embodiment describes
fins 488 havingstraight edges 496, edges defining other shapes may also be used as long as the configuration ofvalve clip 486 is adjusted accordingly. -
Valve clip 486 may be made of any preferably weather resistant material such as a plastic or a metal. In the illustrative embodiment,valve clip 486 is injection moulded as a single piece using a plastic that enables tabs 514 to be resilient. - Referring to FIG. 29, a side burner434′ is configured for use with
shelf bracket 414. The configuration and installation ofvalve clip 486 and the other elements of side burner 434 is substantially the same as described above for side burner 434, and are not described further. - One
shelf bracket 414 may be used to secureburner tray 440.Shelf bracket 414 is installed in substantially the same manner as described above in the context ofshelves 68″ and 70″.Bolts 404 are inserted intobracket holes 426, throughholes 532 inburner tray 440, and then throughholes 412 insupport portion 340′ or 342′ (side burner 434′ may also be attached to supportportions Bolts 404 may then be secured with wing nuts 406.Burner tray 440 may be attached to the remainingsupport portion 340′ or 198′ with at least onebolt 404 inserted throughholes 532 intray 440 andholes 406 in the support member.Bolts 404 may then be secured with wing nuts 406. - Panel
- Referring to FIG. 31, a cross piece, in the nature of a generally
rectangular panel 72, is mounted betweensupport members leg member support member 62 and aleg member support member 64. The generallyplanar panel 72 substantially conforms to the shape of opening 534 (see FIG. 32) which is generally defined by thesupport members cross beam 66 andconsole 86.Panel 72 may also be curved or bowed, or some other shape that substantially spans opening 534, and may have a flange or other protrusion (not shown) to at least partially obscure anadjacent leg member Panel 72 is preferably mounted to be substantially parallel to crossbeam 66. - A
pocket 536 may be integrally formed inpanel 72.Pocket 536 may be used for holding condiments or utensils (not shown).Pocket 536 may have a bottom 538 which projects frompanel 72. Sides ofpocket 536 may be defined by a portion ofpanel 72 and at least onewall 540 which traversesbottom 538. Additional walls such aswall 541 may be added to define a four-sided pocket 538 having a bottom 538. In the illustrative embodiment,pocket 536 extends along substantially the entire length ofpanel 72. To better retain items stored withinpocket 536, at least one ofpocket sides pocket 536 may be facilitated by tiltingpocket 536 away from the plane ofpanel 72, for example by 12 degrees. The location ofpocket 536 may be varied relative tolongitudinal edges panel 72. For example, as shown in FIG. 2,pocket 536′ may be located adjacentlongitudinal edge 544′ of analternative panel 72′, described below. -
Panel 72 has at least one mounting member, and preferably two retaining or mounting members, in the nature of mounting posts or pins 546, each of which extends from an edge thereof. Eachpin 546 extends from an edge 548 ofpanel 72 that is substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal axis ofpocket 536.Pins 546 may be coaxial and are oriented for insertion into corresponding mounting holes 550 located insupport members pin 546 may rest, and may additionally be frictionally retained, therein. Mounting holes 550 are preferably located in one oflegs support member pin 546 projects from an edge ofpanel 72, adjacent a corner thereof, and each corresponding mounting hole 550 is located adjacent arespective bridging member Pins 546 may also lie in substantially the same plane aspanel 72. -
Panel 72 may have an additional mounting member in the nature of a retainingclip 552. Retainingclip 552 may be located along edge 548 ofpanel 72, and located at a distance, for example ten inches, frompin 546. Additional retaining clips 552 may be added. Each retainingclip 552 is preferably located to correspond to the location of aleg member panel 72 is installed. Retainingclip 552 may be made of a resilient material, and may have a shape that conforms to a portion, and preferably at least a semi-circular half, of the lateral perimeter of acorresponding leg member leg member clips 552 may have asemi-circular surface 554 corresponding to the shape ofleg member clip 552 is attached to, or integrally formed with,panel 72 at a mid-point of thecurved retaining clip 552. In this configuration, eachclip 552 receives and retains a portion of arespective leg member panel 72 in a direction substantially transverse to the plane ofpanel 72. If a leg member, such asleg 98′, having a non-round cross-section is used, then retainingclip 552 may be configured accordingly. - In an alternative embodiment, each
clip 552 may be attached topanel 72 at anend 556 ofclip 552 instead of a mid-section (not shown). In this embodiment,surface 554 ofclip 552 is preferably configured to conform to a greater portion of the circumference ofleg member resilient clip 552 is attached to aleg member clip 552 is attached, a resilient free end ofclip 552 must be forced away frompanel 72 to accommodate the wider diameter ofleg member leg member clip 552 the free end resiliently returns to its initial position to engage a portion ofleg member clip surface 554. The illustrative embodiment ofclip 552 may be likewise configured to form a snap fit withleg member free ends 556 to encompass a greater portion of the lateral perimeter oflegs - In a preferred configuration, the mounting members, including
pins 546 andclips 552, substantiallysecure panel 72 betweensupport members support members Pins 546 andclips 552 are both preferably integrally formed withpanel 72, which may be made of a plastic or metal. - Referring to FIGS. 56 and 57,
alternative panel 72′ has a general configuration similar to that ofpanel 72.Panel 72′ differs in that it may be disassembled permitting it to fit within a smaller volume than in its assembled state for storage or shipping.Panel 72′ may be generally planar, and may be mounted tolegs 98′, betweensupport members 62′ and 64′, usingpanel mounting brackets 557.Brackets 557 may be identical, but are preferably mirror images of one another. Accordingly, the description of onebracket 557 applies to the other. -
Bracket 557 has a mountingpin 546′, which is configured and operates in a similar manner as described for mountingpin 546, for mounting thebracket 557 toleg member 98′. Similarly, aclip 552′, which is configured and operates in a similar manner as described forclip 552, may be added to one or bothbrackets 557 for mounting thebracket 557 toleg member 98′.Bracket 557 may be injection moulded or otherwise formed from a plastic, or moulded from a metal. -
Panel 72′ may additionally have anintegral pocket 536′.Pocket 536′ may be defined on one side bypanel 72′, and on another side by a generally opposedside 540′, which is joined topanel 72′ by a bottom 538′.Bottom 538′ may located at substantially right angles to bothpanel 72′ andside 540′ to form a three-sided pocket. Alternatively, bottom 538′ may be angled to a greater or lesser degree relative topanel 72′ and/orside 540′ to change the orientation of an item contained withinpocket 536′, as described above forpocket 536. A single sheet, for example, of a metal such as steel, may be used to formpanel 72′ andpocket 536′ by making two folds therein to definepanel 72′, bottom 538′ andwall 540′, respectively. The sheet thus formed may have a generally right angled J-shaped cross-section which cross-section terminates atopposed edges 559 and 561 which generally trace the J-shaped cross-section. Alternatively,panel 72′ may be formed to have a rounded generally J- or U-shaped cross-section, or some other shape defining an integral pocket (not shown), by bending a single sheet of metal or other appropriate material, accordingly. In the present embodiment, bottom 538′ may include one or more holes (not shown) to permit drainage of a liquid such as rain water frompocket 536′. -
Pocket 536′ may additionally be bounded bypanel mounting brackets 557 adjacent respectiveopposed edges 559 and 561 to define a five-sidedpocket including wall 540′,panel 72′, mountingbrackets 557, and bottom 538′.Brackets 557 may be removably attached to wall 540′,panel 72′, and bottom 538′ along edges thereof. Eachbracket 557 abutsrespective edges 559 or 561 to removably retainwall 540′,panel 72′, and bottom 538′ therebetween.Brackets 557 may additionally include one or more flanges for abutting a surface of one or more ofwall 540′,panel 72′, and bottom 538′, to inhibit movement thereof. The flanges ofbracket 557 preferably abut therespective wall 540′,panel 72′, or bottom 538′, adjacent edge 559 (or 561, as the case may be). - In the illustrative embodiment,
bracket 557 has aflange 563 for abutting a surface ofwall 540′adjacent edge 559. Similarly,flanges abut panel 72′ and bottom 538′, respectively. To further inhibit movement ofwall 540′,panel 72′, and bottom 538′, additional flanges may be added tobracket 557 to abut an opposite surface ofwall 540′,panel 72′, and bottom 538′. For example,discontinuous flange 569, havingflange portions panel 72′ opposite toflange 567. In this configuration, a portion ofedge 559 may rest betweendiscontinuous flange 569 andflange 567. Similarly, aflange 571 may abut a surface ofwall 540′ opposite to flange 563.Flanges angled flange 585, which may reinforce theconnected flanges - One or more of the flanges may also have reinforcements. For example,
flange 569 a may have a reinforcingflange 573. Reinforcements may also increase the overall rigidity ofbracket 557. -
Panel 72′ may additionally include one ormore holes 575 located adjacent one or bothedges 559 and 561 for receiving one or morerespective tabs 577 which project from a flange ofbracket 557, such asflange 567. Whentab 577 is inserted throughhole 575,tab 575 inhibits movement ofpanel 72′ in a direction generally transverse to the projection oftab 577 to inhibit removal ofbracket 557 frompanel 72′. -
Panel 72′ may additionally have anangle 579 formed therein for directing afree end 581 ofpanel 72′ to locateadjacent console 86 when barbeque 60 is fully assembled.Angle 579 may traversepanel 72′ betweenedges 559 and 561 causingfree end 581 to be displaced from the plane ofpanel 72′.Free end 581 is preferably displaced to the same side ofpanel 72′ thatside 540′ is located.Brackets 557 may be likewise angled to accommodateangle 579. For example,bracket 557 may haveangle 583 formed therein. - To assemble
brackets 557 with theintegral wall 540′,panel 72′, and bottom 538′, portions ofedge 559 are inserted betweenopposed flanges flanges bottom 538′ abuttingflange 565. Edge 561 is similarly inserted between the flanges of the remainingbracket 557. As eachedge 559 and 561 is inserted,tab 577 enters and locates withinhole 575.Tab 577 may additionally be ramped, to permit edge 559 (or 561) to be guided overtab 577 before tab entershole 575. Rampedtab 577 preferably has a generally right-angle triangle cross-section so that a snap fit may be formed as rampedtab 577 entershole 575.Brackets 557, includingpanel 72′ held therebetween, may then be attached to supportmembers 62′ and 64′ in a manner similar to that described forpanel 72. - In an alternative embodiment (not shown),
brackets 557 may have a slot or groove instead of, or in addition to, flanges, for receivingedge 559 or 561. - Casting
- Referring to FIGS. 1, 3 and4,
grill housing 74 has opposedcastings burner 80,grill plates 82, warmingrack 84 and angled bars 88. In operation, thecastings upper casting 76 and alower casting 78. - Lower casting78
supports burner 80 andgrill plate 82.Angled bars 88 for deflecting heat may also be supported bylower casting 78. The casting 78 preferably has aninterior surface 558 that defines a volume, which volume may be generally box-shaped. Theinterior surface 558 terminates at anedge 560 defining anopening 562 which may be generally rectangular. A closure such as upper casting 76 may be provided to inhibit loss of the heat produced byburners 80. Upper casting 76 preferably has an interior surface (not shown) that defines a volume, which volume may be generally box-shaped. The interior surface terminates at anedge 564 which defines anopening 568.Opening 568 is preferably generally rectangular, withedge 564 substantially conforming to edge 560 oflower casting 78 to reduce spaces or gaps therebetween. This may reduce heat loss from within thegrill housing 74 whencastings Interior surface 558 oflower casting 78 and the interior surface of upper casting 76, and theirrespective edges - As shown in FIG. 32,
castings openings edges castings grill housing 74 to the surrounding environment.Castings grill plate 82. At least onehinge 570 preferably joins upper casting 76 to lower casting 78.Hinge 570 has a bolt 572 (shown in phantom) which is connected toupper casting 76, and semi-circular receivingmembers 574 and 576, which are connected to lower casting 78 and are configured to receivebolt 572.Bolt 572 may be slidingly inserted between semi-circular receivingmembers 574 and 576, to formhinge 570. A free end ofbolt 572 may receive abolt clip 578 to inhibit removal ofbolt 572 from its position between receivingmembers 574 and 576. An axial groove orhead 580 may be included at the bolt free end to inhibit axial removal ofbolt clip 578. - A
handle 582, connected toupper casting 76, may be gripped to move upper casting 76 relative to lower casting 78. Handle 582 is preferably made of a heat resistant material such as wood or an appropriate plastic so that it remains relatively cool to the touch even when thecastings resistant gaskets 584, sandwiched betweenhandle 582 and casting 76, may be installed to inhibit heat transfer between casting 76 and handle 582. Handle 582 may be attached to casting 76 using at least one, and preferably two, fasteners in the nature of threadedposts 586 projecting from ends ofhandle 582′ (shown in FIG. 2) orbolts 588 for insertion into handle 582 (as shown in FIG. 1). The installation of either handle 582 or 582′ is similar. For example, to install handle 582′, the generally parallel threadedposts 586 are inserted intohandle holes 590 passing throughupper casting 76. As noted above, a gasket orgaskets 584′ may be placed betweenhandle 582′ and casting 76. Once inserted throughhandle holes 590, threadedposts 586 may be manually secured by either wing-nuts 592 or in some other manner to hold handle 582 fixed adjacent to casting 76. Atemperature gauge 594 may also be attached toupper casting 252 in a similar manner as described forhandle 582. In particular,temperature gauge 594 may be manually installed and fastened, for example, usingwing nuts 592 or speed nuts (not shown). - To accommodate various internal components, such as
burners 80,grill plate 82, warmingrack 84 andangled bars 88, the shape of thecastings - Referring to FIG. 2,
lower casting 78 may rest onsupport members bolt 596 may be used to inhibit movement oflower casting 78 relative to supportmembers Bolt 596 may be inserted into a hole or castingbore 598 passing throughlower casting 78, whereinbore 598 is substantially coaxial with a threadedbore 600 in bridgingmember lower casting 78 is aligned for assembly tomember lower casting 78 to bridgingmember bolt 596 is inserted through castingbore 598, starting adjacentinterior surface 558.Bolt 596 is then received by threadedbore 600 and tightened to attachlower casting 78 to bridgingmember - As the bridging
members members member member 102 as bridgingmember 104, the bridging member need only to be rotated 180 degrees about its longitudinal axis. To limit repetition, only one half of the symmetrical bridging members is described. It will be understood that the undescribed other half of the symmetrical bridging has as similar structure. - Each bridging member, for
example member 102, may be provided with at least oneflange 602 having the threadedbore 600.Flange 602 additionally provides a support surface 604 for supportinglower casting 78. In its operative position, support surface 604 is preferably generally horizontally oriented and located at about waist height. For example, support surface 604 may be located 26 inches from the base ends 110, 112 ofleg members member 102 may be achieved by including at least one, and preferably four,protuberances 606 formed therein.Protuberances 606 preferably protrude by a distance that is substantially the same as the thickness of the material from which bridgingmember 102 is made, and have a generally symmetrical shape such as a rectangle or oval. At least twoprotuberances 606 straddle each bend 608 (which is formed by flange 602) so that bend 608 lies along a longitudinal centerline of eachprotuberance 606. Instead of includingprotuberances 606, increased rigidity of bridgingmember 102 may be achieved by attaching at least one, and preferably four, gussets (not shown) thereto in locations similar to those described forprotuberances 606. -
Bolt 596 is preferably configured so that it may be manually installed and tightened.Bolt 596 includes ahead 610 that may be gripped.Head 610 may be cylindrical, having an oval cross-section, wherein the minor axis of the oval cross-section is greater than the thickness of thehead 610. A threadedshaft 612 extends from the center of theoval head 610 along the cylinder axis, and may be integrally formed withhead 610. For enhanced gripping, a protrusion fromhead 610, such asposts 614, may be added.Posts 614 protrude from a side ofhead 610 opposite to threadedshaft 612.Posts 614 are preferably spaced apart and equidistant to the axis ofshaft 612 to permit increased torsional leverage about the axis ofshaft 612 when thebolt 596 is tightened or loosened. Due to the heat produced by theburners 80,bolt 596 is preferably made of a material, such as cold forged steel, that does not deform when subjected to high temperatures. - Referring to FIGS. 1 and 4,
head 610 may alternatively be configured as a manually tightenable fastener in the nature of anut 610′ having a threadedbore 616 through its axis, instead of threadedshaft 612. A member in the nature of a post or a threadedpost 612′ may be partially threaded into the threaded bore 600 offlange 602 so that it protrudes from support surface 604. Threadedpost 612′ may alternatively be welded directly toflange 602. A free end of the threadedpost 612′ is inserted into thebore 598 passing through thelower casting 78. Threadedpost 612′, and therefore casting 78, may then be secured to support 62, 64 by threading and tighteningnut 610′ about the threadedpost 612′, whereby the casting 78 is sandwiched betweennut 610′ andflange 602. Because the threadedpost 612′ is preferably first connected to flange 602, it may further serve as a locator for positioning thelower casting 78 relative to the bridgingmembers post 612′ may additionally have a head to form abolt 618 which may be threaded through threadedbore 600, with its free end protruding from support surface 604. - Referring additionally to FIGS.71A-72, an alternative threaded post in the nature of a
bolt 612″ may be inserted intobore 600 offlange 602.Bolt 612″ additionally has aserrated neck 613 for gripping edges of marginallysmaller bore 600.Nut 610″ may be threaded ontobolt 612″ to retainlower casting 78 therebetween. - In the illustrative embodiment, the casting78 may be guided to a preferred alignment relative to the
support members bore 600 with castingbore 598 so thatbolt 596 may be readily inserted and threaded therethrough. Guide posts 620 protrude fromgrill housing 74, and preferably protrude fromlower casting 78, in a direction away frominterior surface 558. Openings or holes in the nature of guide bores 622, located inflange 602 of bridgingmember 102, may receive the guide posts 620. Theflanges 602 of each bridgingmember - The guide posts620 may protrude from a side, such as bottom 624, of
lower casting 78, bottom 624 being located generally opposite to theopening 562 of thelower casting 78. Eachpost 620 may be located adjacent an extremity of bottom 624, such as atcorners 626. The location ofguide posts 620 andcorresponding bores 622 orientslower casting 78 so that it straddlessupport members - Guide posts620 may be tapered, being narrower at their distal ends 630. The bases 634 of
guide posts 620 are preferably larger than the guide bores 622. The narrower distal ends 630, being smaller than the guide bores 622, may fit more readily within the guide bores 622, reducing the need to precisely align theposts 620 with thebores 622. As the guide posts 620 are inserted into thebores 622, the casting 78 is aligned relative to thesupports edges 632 of the guide bores come into contact with the respective bases 634 ofguide posts 620 to preferably form a friction fit between the guide bore edges 632 and guide posts 620. This arrangement further inhibits movement of thelower casting 78 relative to thesupports bolt 596. The guide posts may alternatively protrude from support surface 604 into bores in lower casting 78 (not shown). - A hollow636 may be provided in support surface 604 to encourage
edges 632 of guide bores 622 to grip guide posts 620.Hollow 636 is defined byadjacent protuberances 606 that are displaced from one another along support surface 604 with an exposed portion of support surface 604 therebetween.Hollow 636 is located adjacent threadedbore 600. In an alternative embodiment, hollow 636 is located with threadedpost 612′, passing therethrough. Whenlower casting 78 is placed ontoprotuberances 606, which overlap support surface 604, a gap (not shown) is formed at hollow 636 between support surface 604 and the bottom 624 oflower casting 78. As bolt 596 (ornut 610′ in an alternative embodiment) is installed and tightened,bolt 596 is drawn into castingbore 598, and the gap narrows due to a partial deformation of support surface 604 (and flange 602) as it is moved towards lower casting 78 at hollow 636. This deformation of surface 604 may create longitudinal tension in support surface 604 causing portions ofedges 632 of guide bores 622 to grip guide posts 620, thereby biasingflange 602 to lower casting 78. - The
lower casting 78 may be provided with a plurality of holes in the nature of vents 286 that permit oxygen to be drawn for use byburners 80 to combust fuel. Air holes 286 are preferably located in the bottom 624 oflower casting 78, and may be arranged beneathburner 80. Thelower casting 78 may further be provided with an ignition hole 287 therethrough for igniting fuel by external means, such as a lighted match (not shown) inserted therein.Burner 80 may alternatively be ignited using an ignition, described below. - To provide a drain for grease and other drippings from food cooked within the
grill housing 74,lower casting 78 may have a drain in the nature of at least onedrain opening 638.Drain opening 638 is preferably centrally located in the bottom 624, and passes therethrough. Bottom 624 may be sloped towards drain opening 638 to encourage draining from substantially the entire bottom 624 oflower casting 78. When in operative position, bottom 624 may be sloped downwards at between five and 15 degrees from the horizontal towardsdrain opening 638. A cup, tube or other means (not shown) for collecting the drippings may be located beneathdrain opening 638. For example, as shown in Figure FIGS. 1 and 2, a cup holder 640 may be inserted into and retained by ahole 642 inlower casting 78adjacent drain opening 638. Cup holder 640 may be made of a section of pliable wire configured to receive and support a cup belowdrain opening 638. - A pair of
rotisserie rebates 644 may be provided inedges 560 oflower casting 78 for supporting a rotisserie (not shown). Therebates 644 are preferably generally located at the mid points of opposite sides ofedges 560. - Biased Supports
- Increased frictional retention of at least one of the components of the barbeque assembly may be achieved by altering the orientation of two components relative to one another after they have been assembled to a new orientation, and then maintaining the components in the new orientation. Changing the relative orientation of connected components causes the components to bear against each other with greater force in the area of interconnection. This may increase the friction between components which may make it more difficult to further move the components relative to each other. This additional force may also cause the connected components to bear on any fastener used to connect them which in turn may make the engaged fastener more difficult to remove. As a result, the connected components are more tightly coupled than connected components to which a force has not been applied.
- Altering the orientation of two connected components may also cause elastic deformation of at least one of the components. A proportionately greater force may then be required to further deform the component. Accordingly, a component subject to a force becomes stiffer and more resistant to further deformation provided that the yield point for the material has not been reached.
- Referring to FIGS.2, and 74 to 77, in the embodiment, a cross member such as
cross beam 66′ may be connected to afirst support member 62′ to orientfirst support member 62′ in an initial position relative to crossbeam 66′. Thesecomponents 62′ and 66′ are preferably fastened to one another so that free movement of the two components about their common connection is limited. Once the two components are connected,support member 62′ may be moved to a second or biased position by applying a force thereto to angularly displace it frombeam 66′ about the common connection between them, for example atconnection area 642. Becausebeam 66′ andsupport member 62′ are already connected, movement ofsupport member 62′ from an initial to a biased position causes thecomponents 62′ and 66′ to bear on each other adjacent their common connection, for example atconnection area 642 oradjacent beam end 128′. Once secured in this biased position, for example by a biasing member (described below), friction between thesupport member 62′ andbeam 66′ is increased which may make it more difficult to separate them once they are assembled and positioned in this manner. At the same time, at least one ofcomponents 62′ and 66′ may be elastically deformed and are more resistant to further deformation than when in an initial position. The structure of the combined components includingcross beam 66′,first support member 62′ and the biasing member may therefore be stiffer than a similar arrangement havingsupport member 62′ in an initial, unbiased, position. - In the
embodiment support member 62′ andbeam 66′ are connected using a fastener. The fastener may be in the nature of a bolt such asbolt 154.Bolt 154 may be received by ahole 156 in abeam connection member 116′ ofsupport member 62′, and may be further inserted through abore 158 inbeam 66′.Bolt 154 may also be secured by a bolt retainer in the nature of a nut orwing nut 160. While this connection may be sufficient, stronger coupling ofsupport member 62′ tobeam 66′ may be achieved by angularly displacingsupport member 62′ relative tobeam 66′ from this initial position to a biased position. For example,support 62′ may be displaced from its initial position by α degrees towardsbeam 66′ (see, for example, FIG. 74) or it may be displaced by β degrees away frombeam 66′ (see, for example, FIG. 75). Minimal displacement is generally required to achieve increased frictional resistance between the connected components. For example, an angle α or β of less than one degree may be sufficient depending on the relative sizes of the joined components and the amount of play therebetween when in the initial position. In FIGS. 74 to 76, α and β are shown as approximately two degrees. This displacement is emphasized in the Figures for illustrative purposes only. The displacement would typically be smaller than depicted, and may be in the range of 0.5 to 5 degrees. However, different angles may be appropriate for members having different dimensions and/or different material properties. If there is play between connected components inconnection area 642 when they are in an initial position, then some or all of any additional play or slack existing between the components may be reduced when the components are moved to a biased position. However, a degree of play in any connection between components is not essential. - As
support member 62′ andbeam 66′ are moved from an initial position to a biased position, bolt 154 may also be subject to increased forces in a number of directions. For example, bolt 154 may experience increased shear force assupport member 62′ is moved relative tobeam 66′. Shear forces may be caused by edges or boundaries ofhole 156 and bore 158 acting onbolt 154. Ifbolt 154 is secured withnut 160, then bolt 154 may also be subject to tensile forces asconnected support member 62′ andbeam 66′ are moved. Any one or more of these forces acting onbolt 154 may inhibit the removal ofbolt 154 from within its associatedhole 156 and bore 158. For example, any shear force acting onbolt 154 will increase the friction betweenbolt 154 and the shear surfaces. Likewise, a tensile force on asecured bolt 154 can increase friction between the engaged threads ofbolt 154 andnut 160. - In a similar manner to that described above,
beam 66′ may be connected tosecond support 64′ to similar effect. In the preferred embodiment, first andsecond support members 62′ and 64′ are connected to crossbeam 66′ usingfasteners support members 62′ and 64′ are in an initial position (see, for example, FIG. 74 or FIG. 75).Support members 62′ and 64′ are preferably moved to a biased position by moving them either towards each other or away from each other at a similar angular displacement relative to crossbeam 66′. Once located in a biased position,support members 62′ and 64′ may be held in place by a biasing member such aslower casting 78, which is in spaced relationship withfasteners support members 62′ and 64′ in the manner described above. - In this configuration, one or more of the connected components (i.e., first and
second support members 62′ and 64′,cross beam 66′, lower casting 78) are elastically deformed. As noted above, this elastic deformation can lead to a stiffened and resilient structure because a proportionately greater force than the biasing force is required to further deform the one or more components. A biasing force that causes any component, includingfasteners - If
lower casting 78 is secured in the manner described above then the connections betweensupport members 62′ and 64′ andlower casting 78 form at least one friction system that may also be subject to additional forces. For example, one or more first friction members in the nature ofguide posts 620 and bolt 612′ (which may also be a friction member) may be subject to additional forces as they resist the deflection of the biased supports 62′ and 64′. This in turn may encourage increased frictional retention ofguide posts 620 and bolt 612′ within theirrespective bores guide posts 620 than ifsupports 62′ and 64′ are not biased. For example, guideposts 620 may experience greater forces at their interface with associated second friction members, which may includeedges 632 of guide bores 622, when guide posts 620 frictionally co-operate to maintain displacement ofsupports 62′ and 64′ in a biased position.Bolt 612′ may subject to additional forces in a similar manner as described for guide posts 620. These additional forces are applied at one or more points of connection between lower casting 78 and supports 62′ and 64′, whether supports 62′ and 64′ are biased towardscross beam 66′ or away from it. - While
lower casting 78 is preferably used as a biasing member, alternatively, one or more members such as a strut (not shown) may be used to maintain two components (such assupport 62′ and cross beam 66) in a biased position relative to each other. Alternatively,console 86 orpanel 72′ may act as a biasing member. - In the embodiment, supports62′ and 64′ are attached to cross
beam 66′ in an initial position. In this initial position the combined components form a generally U-shaped structure, with the arms of the “U” (i.e., supports 62′ and 64′) forming an angle of less than 90 degrees with the base of the “U” (i.e.,cross beam 66′), as shown in FIG. 74.Supports 62′ and 64′ may then be biased away fromcross beam 66′ to a biased position wherein the arms of the “U” are generally perpendicular to the base, as shown in FIG. 77. For example, respective free ends ofsupports 62′ and 64′ may be displaced from one another along an axis substantially parallel to a longitudinal axis ofcross beam 66′ when supports 62′ and 64′ are biased from an initial position to a biased position. Referring to FIG. 76, this biasing is preferably achieved by aligningguide posts 620 with the guide bores 622 of one support member, forexample support member 62′, and inserting the guide posts 620 therein. Because supports 62′ and 64′ are still in an initial position, the remaining guide posts 620 that are associated with the guide bores 622 ofsupport 64′ are misaligned.Support 64′ may be manually moved to a biased position to align guide bores 622 with guide posts 620. At thesame time support 62′ is encouraged to a biased position as well. The biased position of bothsupports 62′ and 64′ may be maintained by inserting remaining guide posts 620 within the guide bores 622 ofsupport 64′, as shown in FIG. 77.Heads 610′ may then be attached tobolts 612′ to secure thelower casting 78 tosupports 62′ and 64′. Lower casting 78 may be similarly attached tosupports 62′ and 64′ ifsupports 62′ and 64′ have an initial position in which they are angled away fromcross beam 66′. -
Supports 62′ and 64′ may be oriented in different initial positions by changing the angle at whichbeam connection member 116′ is welded tolegs 98′ and 100′. Alternatively, different initial positions may by configured by adding one or more bends or curves to either one or more ofsupports 62′ and 64′ andcross beam 66′ (not shown). The relative location ofguide posts 620 and/or guideholes 622 may additionally or alternatively be modified so that supports 62′ and 64′ have to be moved from to a biased position to permit theposts 620 andholes 622 to engage. As the above examples illustrate, there are many modifications or adjustments that may be made to any one or more of the components to be connected to ensure that at least one of the components is moved from an initial position to a biased position to impart additional force on at least one of the connections between that component and a second component. - Other components of the barbeque assembly60 may be likewise assembled according to the principles described above. Other embodiments of barbeque 60, such as those illustrated in FIG. 1, may also be configured and assembled in the manner described.
- Burner Support Member
- Referring to FIGS. 33 and 34,
lower casting 78 contains at least oneburner 80.Burner 80 may be an H-shapedburner 80, a bar-shapedburner 80′ (see FIG. 2), or some other appropriate barbeque burner known in the art. To satisfy government standards, such as ANSI Z21-58 in the U.S. and CGA 1.6 in Canada,support members 646 are attached to burners to retain and maintain the burner in a preferred orientation withinlower casting 78. Thesupport members 646 of the illustrative embodiments described below permit the burner to be manually installed in and removed from barbeque 60 without tools.Support members 646 may be used in combination with many different burner configurations, including the H-shapedburner 80 and bar-shapedburner 80′. The attachment and use of thesupport members 646 is similar in each case. Accordingly, the following description ofsupport members 646 as used in conjunction with an H-shapedburner 80 is an example and may apply in substantially the same manner to burners having different configurations. - H-shaped barbeque burners typically have four coplanar arms, such as
arms 648 ofburner 80. When in a preferred orientation, the fourarms 648 ofburner 80 are generally horizontal. At least onesupport member 646 is attached to eacharm 648. Eachsupport member 646 generally uniformly displaces thearms 648 ofburner 80 from the lower casting bottom 624 and inhibits movement ofburner 80 relative to lower casting 78. Eachsupport member 646 has a generallyplanar strip portion 650.Strip portion 650 may be rectangular, and is preferably constructed from a resilient heat resistant material such as a metal. For example, aluminized steel may be used.Strip portion 650 is attached along an edge (not shown) toarm 648 to generally form a right angle witharm 648. Attachment may be by welding or some other securing means that is not significantly affected by high temperatures. Alternatively,strip 650 may have a bend therein to form atoe 652 protruding more or less normal to a longitudinal axis ofstrip 650.Toe 652 may be welded toarm 648, thereby providing a larger area for attachment to arm 648 than along an edge ofstrip 650. As shown in FIGS. 66-68, in an alternative embodiment of burner support,burner support member 646′ (described below), atoe 652 may additionally include aattachment member 655 for attaching thesupport member 646′ toburner 80.Attachment member 655 may also be applied totoe 652 in a similar manner. - Adjacent a
free end 654 ofstrip 650 is acatch 656 for securing strip 650 (and by connection burner 80) whencatch 656 is inserted into anopening 658 in the bottom 624 oflower casting 78. Catch 656 is preferably generally rectangular in shape, and may be formed fromstrip 650 by making three incisions instrip 650, or stampingstrip 650, to define three sides ofrectangular catch 656. A fourth side ofcatch 656 is defined by bending afree end 662 of three-sided catch 656 away fromstrip 650 to form abend 660 wherecatch 656 meetsstrip 650.Bend 660 is preferably adjacent stripfree end 654, and has an axis which is generally parallel to the plane ofarms 648. As a result ofbend 660, catchfree end 662 is displaced fromstrip 650. Oncebend 660 is formed, catchfree end 662 is preferably displaced by greater than zero and less than 90 degrees from an opening 664 formed by the bending ofcatch 656 away fromstrip 650. An angle of about 30 degrees may be defined, for example. In the illustrative embodiment, the material used forstrip 650 may be sufficiently pliable to permit the formation ofbend 660, but is of sufficient resilience that when a force is applied to catchfree end 662 to move it through an arc about the axis ofbend 660 to move it towards opening 664 insupport member 646, catchfree end 662 returns substantially to its original position at about 30 degrees displacement from opening 664 of support member 664 when the force is no longer applied. -
Support member 646 also has at least one protrusion, such as ashoulder 666 which contacts portions ofinterior surface 558 oflower casting 78 adjacent to castingopening 658 to prevent further insertion ofsupport member 646 into castingopening 658. In the illustrative embodiment,support member 646 has twoshoulders 666.Shoulders 666 define aneck 669 for insertion into castingopening 658.Shoulders 666 are located at a predetermined distance fromarm 648 to provide a preferred displacement ofburner arms 648 from lower castinginterior surface 558. For example, shoulders 666 may be displaced fromarm 648 by between 0.5 and 1 inch, and preferably by 0.65 inches.Shoulders 666 may be formed by bending portions of the freeparallel sides 670 ofstrip 650 adjacentfree end 654 to formtabs 668 which are preferably perpendicular to the plane ofstrip 650. The creation oftabs 668forms shoulders 666 at portions of the freeparallel sides 670,adjacent tabs 668. To facilitate bending oftabs 668, a transverse cut to defineshoulder 666 may be made in eachside 670, beforetabs 668 are bent. Alternatively, shoulders 666 may be added tostrip 650 by welding or by otherwise connecting one or more metal tabs or pieces to strip 650 to inhibit insertion ofsupport member 646 intoopening 658 beyond a desired threshold (not shown). In the above embodiments, thetabs 668, being located in planes generally perpendicular to the plane ofstrip 650, may also add rigidity to strip 650. - Burners, such as
burner 80, typically have at least one, and frequently two,fuel input ducts 672. Free ends 674 ofducts 672 have guards, such asspider guards 474, to prevent insects from enteringducts 672.Guards 474 engage outlets of console 86 (described below) to receive a mediated flow of fuel which is supplied to theburner 80 viaducts 672. - To manually install
burner 80 intolower casting 78, free ends 674 of eachduct 672 are inserted through separateburner duct passages lower casting 78.Passages propane tank 90, viaducts 672 toburner 80. Once duct free ends 674 are inserted throughpassages lower casting openings 658. Because the manner in which eachsupport 646 is installed and removed is similar, a description for the installation of just onesupport 646 is provided.Bend 660 enters opening 658 and is followed bycatch 656 which angles away fromstrip 650, as described above. Assupport 646 is further inserted intoopening 658, catch 656 encounters an edge of opening 658, and is deformed and caused to move closer to strip 650 to a depressed or deformed position (not shown) to permit further insertion ofsupport 646. When catchfree end 662 passes throughopening 658, theresilient catch 656 returns to its initial angled displacement fromstrip 650, and is positioned adjacent toopening 658. In this configuration, a snap fit may be formed betweencatch 656 andlower casting 78. In this position, thefree end 662 ofcatch 656 is adjacent to, and preferably abuts,lower casting 80 to hinder removal ofsupport 646 from opening 658. Oncecatch 656 passes throughopening 658,shoulders 666 abut portions ofinterior surface 558 oflower casting 78 adjacent to castingopening 658 to inhibit further insertion ofsupport 646 intoopening 658. To manually removesupport 646 from opening 658, catchfree end 662 is moved towardstrip 650 to permitsupport 646 to clear the edges ofopening 658 and be removed. Thetabs 668 may additionally each have ahole 680 therethrough.Holes 680 are coaxial with one other, and may optionally receive a pin such as a cotter pin to further inhibit removal ofsupport member 646 from opening 658. - In the illustrative embodiment, during installation of
support 646,shoulders 666 abut thelower casting 78 immediately after catchfree end 662 passes throughopening 658. This configuration attempts to minimize movement ofsupport 646 along an axis parallel to the direction of insertion, by retaininglower casting 78 betweenshoulders 666 on one side and catchfree end 662 on the other. -
Casting opening 658 is preferably made sufficiently large to permit insertion ofsupport 646 withcatch 656 in a depressed position, yet sufficiently small to prevent removal ofsupport 646 withcatch 656 in its initial position. The castingopenings 658 which receive eachsupport 646 are also preferably of a size and location to inhibit movement ofburner 80 in a direction transverse to the direction of insertion. For example, transverse movement may be inhibited by configuring an edge of opening 658 to be located immediatelyadjacent strip 650. In this configuration, if a transverse force is applied toburner 80, movement of theburner 80 is hindered bystrip 650 coming into contact with an edge ofopening 658. Alternatively, the location of the edges of the openings relative to the insertedsupport members 646, may be made such that any two or more of the foursupport members 646 abut an edge of theircorresponding opening 658 when subjected to a force transverse to the direction of insertion, which in turn hinders transverse movement ofburner 450. Any transverse force applied toburner 80 causes at least twosupports 646 to abut edges of their respective holes to limit transverse movement of theburner 80. - Referring to FIGS.52A-52C, in an alternative embodiment of
burner support member 646, labelled 646′, catch 656 may be formed by bending thefree end 654′ ofstrip 650′ to form acatch 656′ and abend 660′ with similar characteristics to those described above.Shoulders 666′ may be formed by cut-outs orrebates 667′ instrip 650′.Rebates 667′ also define freeparallel sides 670′ of aneck 669′ ofstrip 650′, from which catch 656′ depends. - Referring additionally to FIGS.65-68,
support member 646′ is installed into castingopening 658, and operates, in a similar manner as described above forsupport member 646. In particular, bend 660′ enters opening 658 and is followed byneck 669′ and catch 656′, which angles away fromstrip 650′ and may guideneck 669′ into proper alignment withinopening 658. Ascatch 656′ is inserted further intoopening 658, it encounters an edge ofopening 658 and is caused to move closer toneck 669′ to a depressed position to permit further insertion. When catch 656′ clears opening 658 it resiliently returns to its initial position and is positionedadjacent opening 658. In this position, catch 656′ inhibits removal ofneck 669′ fromopening 658. -
Opening 658 may be generally rectangular in shape, having a length of approximately 0.45 inches and a width of approximately 0.3 inches, wherein its length runs generally parallel to an axis ofbend 660′ whenneck 669′ is installed therein. To limit movement ofburner 80,neck 669′ may have a width of marginally less than 0.45 inches so that freeparallel sides 670′ abut or are adjacent to opposed parallel edges of opening 658 whenneck 669′ is located withinopening 658. Similarly, to limit movement ofburner 80, supports 646′ may be positioned to co-operate so thatneck 669′ of eachsupport 646′ abuts or is adjacent to another edge ofopening 658. For example, if twosupports 646′ are used and onesupport 646′ is positioned to abut a longitudinal edge of afirst opening 658, then thesecond support 646′ is preferably located to abut an opposite longitudinal edge of asecond opening 658. In a similar manner as described forsupport member 646,support member 646′ may additionally have a hole therethrough (not shown) for optionally receiving a removable pin such as a cotter pin which further inhibits removal ofsupport member 646′ fromopening 658. - Referring to FIGS.64A-64C,
burner support member 646′ may additional include an indent orembossment 659 which may increase the rigidity ofstrip 650′.Embossment 659 may be substantially linear and may run along a longitudinal centerline ofstrip 650′. It may additionally traverse a portion ofneck 669′. - In a further alternative embodiment (not shown), the rectangular catch may be fashioned from the strip by making two incisions in the strip at right angles to one another to define adjacent sides of the rectangular catch. A third side of the catch is a portion of an edge of the strip, and the fourth side of catch is defined by bending the three-sided catch away from strip to form a bend where the catch is attached to the strip. As with other embodiments, the axis of the bend is generally parallel to the plane of
arms 648. - In a further yet alternative embodiment, the catch may be added to the strip by welding or other connection means to provide a catch with the preferred properties described above.
- In any embodiment, the shape of the catch may differ from a rectangular shape as long as the catch is resilient and has a free end that may be moved to a depressed position to permit insertion of
support 646 intoopening 658, and that returns to its initial position to inhibit removal ofsupport 646 from opening 658 once a free end ofsupport 646 is inserted therein. Similarly,support 646 may be of any shape, having shoulders and a catch, that affords insertion of the support into an opening, the support being inhibited from further insertion by the shoulders, and removal of the support being inhibited by an attached or integral catch. - The fuel used by
burner 80 is preferably a pressurized combustible gas, such as propane, that is appropriate for gas barbeques. Because the fuel is pressurized, it is forced into theburner 80 and may be released via a plurality offuel openings 682 in the walls of theburner 80. The flow of fuel is mediated byconsole 86, described below.Fuel openings 682 permit fuel to be released into theinterior 684 oflower casting 78. The fuel may then be ignited. Thefuel openings 682 are preferably located adjacent to a plane that bisects allarms 648 of the H-shapedburner 80. A standard igniter, such aselectronic ignition 686 is attached and retained byigniter clip 688 toburner 80 adjacent thefuel openings 682 of at least twoarms 648 having a common longitudinal axis.Igniter activation assembly 690, which includes an igniter activation knob 692, is attached to console 86, and connected to igniter 686 via igniter wire 694 (see FIG. 1). - Heat Deflectors
- Referring to FIG. 1, a heat deflector in the nature of
angled bars 88 may be installed within casting 78, to encourage heat dissipation within barbeque 60.Burner 80 is sandwiched between casting bottom 624 and angled bars 88.Angled bars 88 may be formed from a single, substantially rectangular sheet of metal.Longitudinal peaks 696 andvalleys 698 may be formed therein, to createangled sides 700 for dissipating heat within thegrill housing 74.Grill plate 82 is preferably located above angled bars 88. In this arrangement, theangled sides 700 may also reduce the accumulation of grease and other drippings from food within thegrill housing 74. When drippings from food supported bygrill plate 82 encounter anangled side 700, they may be heated to a higher temperature and partially vapourized, which vapour may add flavour to food located within thegrill housing 74.Openings 702 located adjacent tovalleys 698 permit drippings that are not vapourized to drop to lower casting bottom 624, to be drawn by gravity to drainopening 638. - At least one and preferably two support struts704 for supporting
angled bars 88, traverse theinterior 684 oflower casting 78, and are located betweenburners 80 and angled bars 88. - Support struts704 may be uniformly displaced from casting bottom 624 by
fins 706 which project frominterior surface 558.Fins 706 are each located to support the respective ends 708 of eachstrut 704. Strut ends 708 preferably have alongitudinal groove 710 for receiving afin 706 which inhibits movement of thestrut 704 when thefin 706 is placed therein. Thefins 706 may be integral with casting 78, or otherwise attached thereto, and may be located to orient support struts 704 in a plane parallel to the plane of thearms 648 ofburner 80, and both are preferably horizontal when operational. At least one and preferably two locatingtabs 712 projecting from eachstrut 704 may enter anopening 702 ofangled bars 88 to encourage a preferred orientation ofangled bars 88, and to inhibit movement ofangled bars 88 relative to strut 704, once angled bars 88 are installed. - Referring to FIG. 2, in an alternative embodiment, a heat deflector such as
lava rocks 714 or ceramic briquettes (not shown) may be provided instead of or in addition to angled bars 88. If these alternatives are used then an appropriate support structure, such asgrate 716, for the lava rocks 714 or ceramic briquettes may be provided.Grate 716 may be supported directly byfins 706, and support struts 704 may be excluded. - Grill and Warming Rack
- Referring again to FIG. 1,
grill plate 82, of a configuration known in the art, is supported by a pair of substantiallyparallel ledges 718 that may be formed in casting 78 (only one ledge is shown).Ledges 718 may be located to orientgrill plate 82 in a plane parallel to the plane of thearms 648 ofburner 80. When in operative position,grill plate 82 is substantially horizontal and is located above angled bars 88. - Barbeque60 may also be provided with a
warming rack 84, that may be in the form of at least onecantilevered shelf 720 for supporting food at a greater distance fromburners 80 than food located ongrill plate 82. As a result of this greater distance, food supported by warmingrack 84 receives less heat than food located ongrill plate 82. Warmingrack 84 may be installed by inserting mountingpins 722 into mountingpin holes 724 located inupper casting 76. Once thepins 722 are inserted,toes 726 of warmingrack support legs 408 may be inserted into toe holes (not shown) or may rest inrebates 644 located inedges 560 oflower casting 78. Either, or both,grill plate 82 andwarming rack 84 may be made from wire, chrome wire, heavy duty porcelain coated wire, porcelainized metal, cast iron or porcelainized cast iron. - Console
- Referring to FIGS. 35, 36,36A, 37 and 38,
console 86 has a control valve 730 for stopping or varying the flow of fuel toburner 80. Alternatively, the flow of fuel toburner 80 may be controlled byseparate valves 730 and 732. Appropriate valves for controlling the flow of a gaseous fuel as are known in the art may be used.Valves 730 and 732 are attached to console body 734 (or 734).Console body 734 is preferably “drawn” from a single sheet of metal to form a substantially rectangular cavity (not shown) for receivingvalves 730 and 732. Theconsole body 734 is made using a die (not shown) which imparts shape to consolebody 734, by impressing the single sheet of metal into a corresponding mould to produce the desired form ofconsole body 734.Holes console body 734 permit knob stems 740 and 742 to protrude therethrough. Knob stems 740 and 742 may then be inserted into respective receptacles incontrol knobs - Referring in particular to FIGS. 36 and 36A, to aid in the proper attachment of
console 86 to barbeque 60, ends 748 and 749 of bridgingmembers tabs Tabs beam 66. Lateral edges 754 ofconsole 86 may have at least one rebate in the nature of anotch 756 and preferably two notches, includingnotch 758, for receivingtabs Tab 750 preferably lies in a plane generally transverse to the plane ofnotch 756, andtab 752 preferably lies in a plane generally transverse to the plane ofnotch 758.Notches edges tabs console 86 thereon. One or both ofnotches slot 764 therein for receiving anedge example tab 750, when the tab is placed therein. Slot 764 preferably is substantially the same thickness astab 750, and is sufficiently wide to permit entry of anedge 760 oftab 750 but is sufficiently narrow to limit movement ofconsole 86 relative totab 750. The remainingtab 752 when placed withinnotch 756 also inhibits movement ofconsole 86. This arrangement permitsconsole 86 to be placed upon and supported bytabs console 86 in a preferred orientation before it is secured. - A
side 765 ofnotch 758, which lies betweenslot 760 andedge 754, may be configured to form an angle of less than 90 degrees withadjacent edge 754 to guidetab 750 intoslot 760. Whenside 765 is angled in this manner, and placed upontab 750,tab edge 760 may come into sliding contact withside 765. Sinceside 765 terminates atslot 760,tab edge 760 is guided byside 765 intoslot 760.Notch 756 may be similarly configured. - Each bridging
member protrusion 766 for securingconsole 86 thereto.Protrusion 766 may be perpendicular to both support surface 604 andtabs side 768 whenconsole 86 is placed ontabs Protrusion 766 lies on the concave side ofconsole 86 and has a threaded bore 770 for receiving a fastener inserted through acorresponding hole 772 inconsole side 768. The fastener may be a screw, and is preferably a bolt 774 (see FIG. 39A and 39B) that may be installed and removed by hand. Once partially inserted intohole 772,bolt 774 is inserted into bore 770 and tightened to secureconsole 86 to bridgingmember 102. The same operation is completed to attachconsole 86 to bridgingmember 104. It should be noted that any form of protrusion may be used as long as receiving bore 770 is positioned to receivefastener 774 to secureconsole 86 to bridgingmembers - Referring to FIG. 39A and 39B, a
head 776 ofbolt 774 may have external grips, such as knurls or crosshatches 778 to provide greater friction to facilitate unassisted installation of thebolt 774. In the illustrative embodiment, thehead 776 is cylindrical, having a diameter of about ⅝ inches and a thickness of about 0.2 inches, or some other size and shape suitable for manual manipulation. A threadedend 780 protrudes substantially co-axially with the axis of thehead 778. Turning of thebolt 774 about its longitudinal axis may also be improved by using a non-circular or non-uniform shaped head (not shown) with the threadedend 780 preferably protruding along an axis passing through a centroid of thehead 778. Thehead 778 may be made of any rigid material, such as nylon plastic or a metal. - Referring to FIGS. 37 and 38 an
alternative console 86′ and bridging member ends 748′ and 749′ is illustrated. In the alternative embodiment, ends 748′ and 749′ do not havetabs longitudinal flange 782 which may be placed at either end onto the respective support surfaces 262 of bridgingmembers flange 780 preferably traverses the distance betweensupport members -
Flange 780 may additionally havetabs 784 at either end thereof. In thisconfiguration console 86′ is supported onsupport surfaces 262 along edges 786 oftabs 784.Tabs 784 each extend generally perpendicularly fromflange 780, and abut, or may be attached to, consolesides 768′. Whiletabs 784 may be co-planar withsides 768′, they preferably lie in a planes parallel tosides 768′, and are marginally closer to one another than if they were co-planar withsides 768′. Because they are in marginally different parallel planes, eachtab 784 meets arespective side 768′ at aradiused boundary 788. The displacement oftab 784 fromside 768′ permits protrusion 766 to lie on the concave side ofconsole 86′, in a similar manner as described forconsole 86′. - To attach
console 86′ to bridgingmembers 102′ and 104′,tabs 784 ofconsole 86′ may be placed upon support surface 604, withsides 768′ each abutting an adjacent leg member, forexample leg member 98, to maintainconsole 86 in a preferred orientation before it is secured. Threaded bore 770 ofprotrusion 766 may then receive a fastener inserted through acorresponding hole 772′ inconsole side 768′. The fastener may be a screw, and is preferablybolt 774. Once partially inserted intohole 772′,bolt 774 is tightened into bore 770 to secureconsole 86′ to bridgingmember 102. The same operation is completed to attachconsole 86′ to bridgingmember 104. It should be noted that any form of protrusion may be used as long as receiving bore 770 is positioned to receivefastener 382 to secureconsole 86′ to bridgingmembers - A fuel hose (not shown) may be connected to control
valves 730, 732. The fuel hose has a connector, for example as manufactured by Marshall Gas of San Marcos, Tex., that may be hand tightened totank 90, or some other fuel source. - In an alternative embodiment (not shown)
console 86 may be attached to barbeque 60 by fasteners for attachingconsole 86 to corresponding ends of bridgingmembers bolts 774. Openings, in the nature of holes, pass through the bridging member ends, and receive a threadedend 780 ofbolt 774. The threadedend 780 may be further received by a corresponding bore inconsole 86, which may be a bushing, fixed in the console body, the bushing having internal threads for threaded engagement with the threadedend 780. The holes in the bridging member ends are smaller than thehead 778 ofbolt 774 to inhibithead 778 from passing therethrough. To attachconsole 86 to bridgingmembers bolts 774 may be inserted through the holes of the bridging members, into the console bushings, and tightened by hand. In this embodiment, to inhibitconsole 86 from pivoting about the bolted connections at the bridging member ends, each end may be provided with flanges. The flanges are preferably located to abut a side ofconsole 86 that is substantially parallel to an axis of rotation that is coaxial with theconsole bolts 774 connectingconsole 86 to bridgingmembers - In a further alternative embodiment, bolt774 may be a nut (not shown). A threaded post may be partially threaded into each of the bushings as described for the previous embodiment, to protrude from the
console 86.Console 86 may then be secured by inserting the threaded posts into the bridging member holes, and then tightening the nuts about the threaded posts. Because the threaded post is preferably first connected to console 86, it may further serve as a locator for positioning theconsole 86 relative to the bridgingmembers - In the illustrative embodiments,
console 86 andpanel 72 may be configured and installed so that corresponding edges thereof abut each other to inhibit movement of one relative to the other. - Leg Extensions and Casters
- Base ends110 and 112 of
leg members wheels 94,casters 96 orleg extensions 114 to support barbeque 60. Base ends 110 and 112 ofsupport member 64 preferably havewheels 94 attached thereto. If base ends 110 and 112 ofsupport member 62 havecasters 96 then barbeque 60 may be moved by applying a generally horizontal force to barbeque 60 to roll it in the direction of the force alongwheels 94 andcasters 96. If base ends 110 and 112 ofsupport member 62 haveleg extensions 74, thenleg extensions 74 must be lifted from a surface supporting barbeque 60 before a generally horizontal force is applied to barbeque 60 to permit rolling motion with attachedwheels 94. Movement of barbeque 60 may be discouraged by addingleg extensions 114 to allleg members Wheels 94,casters 96 andleg extensions 114, regardless of which combination of them is used, are preferably attached so thatgrill plate 82 is substantially horizontal when barbeque 60 is assembled and in an operative position. - Referring to FIG. 12B,
leg extensions 114 support barbeque 60 and protect base ends 110 and 112 ofleg members grill plate 82, and the other components of barbeque 60 may be varied by attachingleg extensions 114 having a desired length to alllegs wheels 94 orcasters 96 to barbeque 60. Becauseleg extensions 114 are attached tolegs - A
plug end 790 ofleg extension 114 substantially conforms to the size and shape of a void (not shown) inbase end 110 ofleg member 98. The void is the internal space typically defined by a hollow leg member, such asleg member 98, having a generally tubular, rectangular or other cross-sectional shape.Plug end 790 terminates at aperipheral shoulder 792 defined by asupport end 794 ofleg extension 114. Varying the length ofsupport end 794 affects the horizontal displacement of barbeque 60. -
Leg extension 114 may be installed by insertingplug end 790 into the void ofleg member 98 untilshoulder 792encounters leg member 98 to prevent further insertion of theextension 114. Becauseplug end 790 preferably substantially conforms to the void inleg member 98, it may be retained in place by friction. To permit easier insertion ofplug end 790, plugend 790 may havelongitudinal rebates 796, forexample forming ribs 798, to reduce the frictional interface betweenplug end 790 andleg member 98. FIG. 2 showsleg extension 114′ having an alternative configuration for insertion into aleg member 98′ having a void with a rectangular cross-section. The cross-sectional shape ofsupport end 794 may be varied and does not have to be similar to that ofplug end 790. -
Leg extension 114 may be secured toleg member 98 using a fastener, such as slotted pin 186 (see FIG. 12B).Leg member 98 has ahole 800 passing laterally therethrough for receiving slottedpin 186.Hole 800 has anentry 800 a and an exit (not shown). Similarly, plugend 790 ofleg extension 114, has ahole 802, passing laterally therethrough for receivingpin 186.Hole 802 has an entry 802 a and an exit (not shown). To installpin 186, therespective entries 800 a, 802 a and the exits are aligned. Slottedpin 186 may then inserted therethrough to hinder movement of theleg extension 114 relative to theleg member 98. - The slotted
pin 186 preferably has ahead 188, which is larger thanentry 800 a to inhibit movement ofpin 186 along its longitudinal axis within theholes Pin 186 may also have acatch 189 to inhibit longitudinal movement of thepin 186 within theholes insertion end 190 ofpin 186.End 190 is located opposite tohead 188. Catch 189 may be marginally larger than the exit ofhole 800 ofleg 98 to inhibitpin 186 from being removed onceend 190 is fully inserted through the exit hole. To facilitate passage of marginallylarger catch 189 through the exit hole, end 190 may be tapered. To further facilitate passage ofcatch 189, end 190 may have at least one and preferably three partiallytransverse slots 192 emanating from a central longitudinal axis ofpin 186. Eachslot 192 is preferably uniformly angularly displaced from the another. As marginallylarger end 190 is inserted through the exit ofhole 800,slots 192permit end 190 to narrow facilitating passage ofcatch 189, therethrough. Slottedpin 186 may be made of a resilient material such as a plastic so thatend 190 returns to its original shape once it passes through the exit ofhole 800 and catch 189 inhibits removal ofpin 186. - Caster plugs804 receive
casters 96 to permit rolling movement of barbeque 60 as described above. As with the description ofleg extensions 114, a description for the attachment of onecaster plug 804 is provided and applies to the attachment of all caster plugs 804. - The configuration and installation of
caster plug 804 is similar to that of theplug end 790 ofleg extension 114, and the description above forplug end 790 substantially applies tocaster plug 804. As withleg extension 114,caster plug 804 has ashoulder 806 to inhibit further insertion of thecaster plug 804 into the void (not shown) inbase end 110 ofleg member 98.Shoulder 806 is preferably of sufficient thickness to prevent deformation of shoulder when in use. For example, a shoulder thickness of 0.04 inches may be used. Unlikeleg extension 114,caster plug 804 has anaxial bore 808 for receiving acaster post 810 of a standard caster, forexample caster 96. Axial bore 808 may have a circumferential rib (not shown) for engaging a correspondingcircumferential groove 812 ofcaster post 810 to inhibit removal ofcaster post 810. Caster plug 804 may be further retained using a slottedpin 186 in substantially the same manner as described for retention of theleg extension 114. The general configuration ofcaster plug 804 may also be varied to accommodate leg members of different cross-sectional shapes. For example, a caster plug (not shown) may be configured for use withrectangular leg member 98′. - If
casters 96 orleg extensions 114 are attached to the same leg members to whichtank base 92 is attached (not shown), then slottedpins 186 may perform the additional function of securingtank base 92 to theadjacent leg members pins 186 are installed in a similar manner as described above, except eachpin 186 also engages aconduit 170 oftank base 92, as described below. - To attach
tank base 92 toleg members leg member respective conduit 170 attached to or, preferably, integrally formed withbase 92.Conduits 170 preferably have a lateral cross-section substantially equal to or larger than the size and shape of the lateral cross-section of therespective leg members conduits 170. If the cross-sections of theconduits 170 andleg members conduit 170 andleg member position tank base 92, theconduits 170, may be moved alongleg members Conduits 170 are attached toleg members pins 186 in substantially the same manner as described above for attachingstrut 118 toleg members leg extensions 114 or caster plugs 804 before insertingpin 186. - Wheels
- Referring to FIGS. 40, 41,42, 43A and 43B,
wheels 94 may be attached tolegs support member 64. Eachwheel 94 is attached to aleg member wheel 94 toleg member 98 applies to the attachment ofother wheels 94 to other leg members, such asleg member 100. -
Wheel 94 may attached toleg member 98 using an axle, such asaxle pin 814, inserted throughhole 800 inleg member 98. This may be the same hole used to retain caster plugs 804 andleg extensions 114. Once attached,wheel 94 may freely rotate aboutaxle pin 814 to facilitate moving of barbeque 60, as described above. -
Wheel 94 is attached to leg member by first inserting anend 816 ofaxle pin 814 into anaxial bore 818 passing throughwheel 94. Once inserted throughbore 818,end 816 is received byentry 800 a, passes through the void in thehollow leg member 98, and extends through the exit ofhole 800 hole. Further insertion ofaxle pin 814 is inhibited by acircumferential shoulder 820 which has a larger diameter thanentry hole 800 a, and abutsleg Wheel 94 is retained byaxle pin 814 with anaxle head 822 at an end ofaxle pin 814 opposite toinsertion end 816.Head 822 is larger thanhole 800. The displacement alongaxle 814 betweenshoulder 820 andhead 822 is preferably marginally greater than the length ofbore 818. This permits free movement ofwheel 94 aboutaxle 814, while discouraging binding of the walls ofbore 818 onaxle 814. - Referring additionally to FIGS. 42A and 42B,
axle 814 may be secured in place with an axle securing apparatus such as anaxle lock 824.Axle lock 824 has abody 826 that is preferably similar in shape to caster plug 804 but has a transverse, generally C-shaped groove orchannel 828 at an end thereof for engaging a securingportion 830 ofaxle pin 814. Securingportion 830 is located betweenend 816 andshoulder 820 ofaxle pin 814. Becausechannel 828 is C-shaped it preferably forms a snap fit withaxle pin 814. -
Axle lock 824 may be attached to barbeque 60 by first insertingaxle pin 814 throughhole 800 inleg member 98.Axle lock 824 may then be attached by inserting C-shapedchannel 828 into the void ofhollow leg member 98. C-shapedchannel 828 may be aligned and brought into contact with securingportion 830 ofaxle 814. As increased force is applied toaxle lock 824 to urge securingportion 830 intochannel 828,resilient edges 832 ofchannel 828 deform and part to permit securingportion 830 to enterchannel 828.Resilient edges 832 then return to their initial position to retain securingportion 830 within channel 828 (shown in FIG. 42B). To further inhibit movement ofaxle pin 814 along its longitudinal axis, securingportion 830 may be provided with a groove in the nature of a transverse orcircumferential groove 834 that receives a stop in the nature of antransverse rib 836 ofchannel 828.Rib 836 may be arcuate, corresponding to the shape ofchannel 828 and may laterally traversechannel 828. -
Axle lock 824 is preferably constructed from a resilient plastic or metal. Ifaxle lock 824 is made of a plastic thenbody 826 may have a cross-section marginally larger than the cross-section of the void inleg member 98 so thataxle lock 824 may be better retained therein. As the marginallylarger axle lock 824 is inserted into the void ofleg member 98,edges 832 of the void entrance preferably engage and peel back or otherwise remove peripheral portions ofbody 826 before it is able to enter the void. While this installation may require added force to be applied toaxle lock 824, it may lead to a more precise mating of theaxle lock 824 and the void. - As illustrated in FIGS. 43A and 43B, alternative axle locks, such as
axle lock 824″′, may be configured to fit voids in leg members such asleg members 98′ and 100′ having alternative cross-sections such as a rectangular cross-section. - Referring to FIGS.61A-63 and 69A-70B, a further alternative axle and axle lock arrangement may be employed.
Alternative axle 814′ may be secured in place with analternative axle lock 824′.Axle lock 824′ has abody 826′ that is preferably similar in shape toaxle lock 824, butbody 826′ differs in that it has a transverse, bore 828′ therethrough adjacent an end thereof for engaging a securingportion 830′ ofaxle pin 814′, instead of C-shapedchannel 828. Securingportion 830′ is located betweenend 816′ andshoulder 820′ ofaxle pin 814′. -
Axle lock 824′ may be attached to barbeque 60 by first insertingbody 824′ havingbore 828′ into the void ofhollow leg member 98. Bore 828′ may be aligned withhole 800 inleg member 98.Axle pin 814′ may then be inserted into an entrance ofhole 800 and intobore 828′.Pin 814′ preferably has atapered end 829 to guidepin 814′ intobore 828′. Bore 828′ may have a correspondingtapered opening 831 which co-operates withtapered end 829 to guideaxle pin 814′ intobore 828′.Pin end 829 may then exit bore 828′ at asecond opening 833′ ofbore 828′, and may pass through an exit ofhole 800 inleg 98 to inhibit removal ofaxle lock 824′ fromleg member 98. -
Second opening 833 may be marginally smaller than a cross section ofaxle pin end 829. To facilitate passage ofend 829 through marginally smallersecond opening 833, end 829 may be tapered. Bore 828′ may additionally have aco-operating taper 837, adjacentsecond opening 833, to directpin 814′ therethrough. - To further facilitate passage of
end 829, portions ofbody 826′ adjacentsecond opening 833 may be resilient. For example,second opening 833 may have at least one and preferably threeslots 835 emanating from a central longitudinal axis ofbore 828′. Eachslot 835 is preferably uniformly angularly displaced from the other. Asend 829 is inserted through the marginallysmaller opening 833,slots 835permit opening 833 to widen, facilitating passage ofend 829 therethrough. Axle lock is preferably made of a resilient material such as a plastic so thatsecond opening 833 returns to its original shape onceaxle pin end 829 passes therethrough, and so that significant manual force is not required to encourage pin end 829 throughsecond opening 833. - To inhibit removal of
axle pin 814′ frombore 828′,axle pin 814′ may be provided with an indent or groove in the nature ofcircumferential groove 834′ for receiving retainingportions 839 ofbody 826′ which generally definesecond opening 833. Onceaxle pin end 816′ passes throughsecond opening 833, resilient retainingportions 839enter groove 834′ to inhibit removal ofpin 814′ frombore 828′. - As illustrated in FIGS.62A-62E, alternative axle locks, such as
axle lock 824″, may be configured to fit voids in leg members such asleg members 98′ and 100′ having alternative cross-sections such as a rectangular cross-section.Alternative axle lock 824″ may co-operate withalternative axle pin 814″ (shown in FIGS. 70A and 70B) to retainwheel 94. - If
wheel 94 is attached to aleg member tank base 92, thenaxle pin 814 is installed in a manner similar to that described above for attachment of theleg extension 114 andcaster plug 804. In particular,axle pin 814 is inserted additionally throughconduit entry hole 174 a and exit hole 174 b to also retainconduit 170 aboutleg member - Wheel bore818 may be protected to some degree from dirt and other matter that may interfere with the rotation of
wheel 94 aboutaxle pin 814. For example, a cover in the nature of acircular hub cap 838 may be attached to head 822 ofaxle pin 814 to inhibit passage of matter betweenaxle 814 and bore 818.Head 822 may have acircumferential flange 840 for engagement by ahub cap clip 842 having two ormore arms 844 which protrude from a side ofhub cap 838.Arms 844 extend in the same general direction, normal to the plane ofhub cap 838, and may haveprotrusions 846 at their distal or free ends 848 for engagingflange 840 ofhead 822.Arms 844 may be located to engageflange 840 while being generally equidistant from one another and generally equidistant from the axis ofhub cap 838. Free ends 848 are preferably resilient to permit grasping offlange 840, as described below. -
Hub cap 838 may be attached to head 822 by bringing free ends 848 into alignment with the periphery ofpin head flange 840. Theprotrusions 846 extend from free ends 848 generally toward the axis ofhub cap 838, and inhibit passage offlange 840 therebetween. In this orientation the axes ofaxle pin 814 andhub cap 838 are generally collinear. A force may be applied tohub cap 838 in the direction ofaxle pin 814 and along its axis to cause free ends 848 to bend away from each other asprotrusions 846 pass overflange 840. Onceprotrusions 846clear flange 840, resilient ends 848 return to their initial shape andprotrusions 846 are adjacent to or abut a side offlange 840 to inhibithub cap 838 from being separated fromaxle 814. To further inhibit passage of matter betweenaxle pin 814 and bore 818,hub cap 838 may have at least onecircumferential flange 850 for engagement by a correspondingcircumferential groove 852 ofwheel 94. - All components of barbeque60, as described above, are preferably made of weather resistant material and/or heat resistant material, as appropriate.
- Assembly
- The following generally describes the preferred steps that a consumer would follow to assemble a barbeque60. In many cases the order of these steps may be varied from that described, but to substantially the same effect as the preferred order. Particular details regarding the assembly of components may be found in the appropriate descriptions above. To minimize the skill required for assembly and to eliminate the need for any tools, a number of components may be pre-assembled before they are made available for purchase by consumers. For example, bridging
members legs beam connection member 116, may also be pre-assembled tolegs like supports Control valves 730 and 732 may be installed withinconsole body 734, handle 582 may be attached toupper casting 76, andwheels 94 and casters 96 (or leg extensions 114) may be attached tolegs - In the preferred method of assembly of barbeque60, the ladder-
like supports free ends portion Shelves free end 377 ofshelf shelf frame 372 and orburner frame 436 may be similarly installed. Alternatively,shelves shelf frame 372 orburner frame 436, may be attached after the combined supports 62 and 64 and across beam 66 are re-oriented so that thesupport members -
Support members support members shelves cross beam 66 may be inserted into therespective receptacles bushings 102 ofcross beam 66 aligned withholes 100.Holes 100 receivescrews 96, which may be inserted in a generally downward direction, and which may be manually tightened to secure beam ends 92 toreceptacles wheels 94,casters 96, and/orleg extensions 114, may be installed either before or aftercross beam 66 is attached to supportmembers - Once
cross beam 66 is attached, the rigid three-sided barbeque grill housing support structure, having two ladder-like supports cross beam 66, may be re-oriented so that thesupport members wheels 94,casters 96, and/orleg extensions 114, if previously assembled). Thesupport members beam 66 combine to form a self-supported frame or barbeque support structure. Other components of the barbeque 60 may then be conveniently attached to the support structure. - As described,
support members beam 66, are assembled by joining one side of the structure (support member 62) to the other side (support member 64). This generally differs from many barbeques known in the art which are assembled from the bottom up, beginning with a lower shelf or base and then bolting individual vertical leg members thereto (not shown). - If
shelves 68′ and 70′ are configured withremovable tray members 370, theremovable members 370 may be placed withinframes 372 and encouraged to frictionally or snap fit withinframe 372 by application of a downward force thereon when they are aligned withinframe 372. If a gravity fit is used, theremovable members 370 need only be placed withinframe 372 in a downward direction. - If used,
front panel 72 may then be assembled betweensupport members supports members members permits mounting pins 546 to be consecutively mounted into their respective mounting holes 550 in theleg members Support members pins 546 in holes 550. Once thepins 546 are located,panel 72 may be pivoted aboutpins 546 into position as mountingclips 552 are snapped in place onto theirrespective legs - Alternatively,
front panel 72 may be installed by concurrently sliding bothclips 552 ontolegs Clips 552 may then be slid into place and mountingpins 546 can then be inserted into their respective holes 550. This mounting method forpanel 72 may be preferable over the former method if theclip 552 is mounted at a mid-point ofclip 552, making it difficult to bend a free ends 556 ofclip 552 sufficiently to permit passage ofleg member clip 552. - The next step in assembling barbeque60 is attaching
console 86 to the bridgingmembers console 86 is placed ontotabs slots 764 receive acorresponding tab Bolt 774 may then be secured by manually inserting it intohole 772 and tightening it in threaded bore 770. In the preferred orientation of bore 770,bolt 774 may be installed horizontally. This step may be alternatively be completed after installation of thelower casting 78, or any of the components thereof. - Tapered guide posts620 of
lower casting 78 may then be aligned with and inserted into guide bores 622. Thelower casting 78 may be retained by a generally downward insertion and manual tightening ofbolts 254 through casting bores 258 and into threaded bores 256. Ifpost 612′ is used thennut 610′ is tightened on to post 612′ in a generally downward direction. Alternatively, lower casting 78 may be installed after installation offront panel 72. -
Burner 80 may then be installed in the manner described above. In particular,burner 80 may be placed withinlower casting 78, andfree ends 674 of eachduct 672 are inserted through separateburner duct passages Support members 646 are then inserted and secured withinopenings 658 by applying a generally downward force to form a snap fit withlower casting 78. Alternatively,burner 80 may be installed after bothlower casting 78 andconsole 86 are installed, in which case igniter wire 694 may be attached to console 86 afterburner 80 is installed. - Side burner assembly434 may then be installed in the manner described above.
Side shelf 68 may alternatively be installed after burner assembly 434 is installed. - If not pre-installed, handle582 and
temperature gauge 594 may be attached toupper casting 76. Upper casting 76 may then be attached to lower casting 78, or installed at a later step as described below. - If not pre-installed, the components of the ignition assembly may be assembled by fastening, for example with bolts or screws, the
igniter activation assembly 690 to the concave side ofconsole 86. Igniter activation knob 692, is attached to igniteractivation assembly 690 from the convex side ofconsole 86. Theigniter activation assembly 690 is then connected to igniter 688 via igniter wire 694. Igniter 694 may be clipped or otherwise attached betweenburner 80 andconsole 86. - In the next step of assembly of barbeque60, support struts 704 are placed onto
fins 706, and one ormore openings 702 ofangled bars 88 are placed over locatingtabs 346 of the support struts 704. One ormore grill plates 82 may then be placed to be supported byledges 718. Thehinge bolts 572 of upper casting 76 are aligned and slidingly engaged with receivingmembers 574 and 576 of thelower casting 78, and may then be retained byclip 578.Cantilevered warming rack 84 may then be installed by inserting mountingpins 722 into mountingpin holes 724 located inupper casting 76. Once thepins 722 are inserted,toes 726 of warmingrack support legs 408 may be placed intorebates 644 located inedges 240 oflower casting 78. If not pre-installed, handle 582 may be attached throughholes 590 inupper casting 76, using hand tightenedbolts 588, andtemperature gauge 594 may be attached throughholes 595 inupper casting 76, using hand tightened wing nuts 592. If applicable,shelf tray 370,shelf slats 408, and/or the elements of burner 222 or 222′ may be attached in the manner described above. Finally,tank 90 may be placed inbase 92, and attached to a fuel connector, which is tightened manually. If an alternate fuel source is used, this may be attached to controlvalves 730, 732. - As will be noted from the above description, the method of assembly described above permits most of the barbeque components to be conveniently installed from a generally top down or horizontal direction. For example, the following connections may be made in a generally top down direction: attaching
cross beam 66 tobeam connection members bolts 200; installingleg extensions 114 or caster plugs 804 toleg shelf 68 toshelf supporting portions lower casting 74 relative to bridgingmember 102; securingnut 610′ to bolt 612′ to attachlower casting 74 to bridgingmember 102; attachingburner 80 to lower casting 74; and moving engagingmember 345 to engagetank collar 316. Because many components may be installed in a downward direction, gravity may assist in the positioning and connecting of parts. For example,console 86 may be placed upon and supported bytabs console 86 in a preferred orientation before it is secured. Installation of components requiring fastening from a bottom up direction is limited. - By enabling the manual and generally top down installation of many components of the barbeque60, the various features described above may enable manufactures to ship unassembled barbeques to reduce costs, while providing a barbeque that may be readily and quickly assembled by unskilled consumers.
- It will be understood by those skilled in the art that this description is made with reference to the illustrative embodiments and methods, and that it is possible to make other embodiments and to make use of other methods, while employing the principles of the invention which fall within the spirit and scope thereof. For example, various embodiments of a barbeque of the present invention may include different combinations of the alternative embodiments of the component parts thereof.
Claims (13)
1. A barbeque grill housing support structure, comprising:
a first member and a second member for supporting said grill housing;
a cross member fastened between said first and second members, said first member being oriented in an initial position relative to said cross member; and
a biasing member attached to said first member and said second member, said biasing member displacing said first member to a biased position in which said first member is displaced from said cross member relative to said initial position.
2. The support structure of claim 1 , wherein respective free ends of said first and second members are displaced from one another along an axis substantially parallel to a longitudinal axis of said cross member when said first member is biased from said initial position to said biased position.
3. The support structure of claim 2 , wherein said biasing member is a barbeque grill housing attached between said first and second members.
4. The support structure of claim 2 , further comprising a friction system adapted to support displacement of said first member in said biased position, said friction system including:
a first friction member on said first member;
a second friction member on said biasing member; and
wherein said first and second friction members frictionally co-operate to support said displacement of said first member in said biased position.
5. The support structure of claim 4 , wherein said first friction member is a post, and said second friction member is an edge of a post hole.
6. The support structure of claim 2 , wherein said biasing member is a console attached between said first and second members.
7. The support structure of claim 2 , wherein said biasing member is attached between said first and second members.
8. The support structure of claim 3 , wherein:
said first member includes a beam connection member having a portion defining a bolt hole therethrough; and
said cross member has portions defining a bore therethrough for receiving a bolt, wherein upon placement of said bolt through said bolt hole and said bore, a friction fit is provided between said bolt and an edge of said bore when said first member is in said biased position.
9. The support structure of claim 1 , wherein said first member is biased towards said cross member when in said biased position.
10. The support structure of claim 1 , wherein said first member is biased away from said cross member when in said biased position.
11. A barbeque grill housing support structure, comprising:
a first member and a second member for supporting said grill housing;
a cross member fastened between said first and second members to orient said first member in an initial position relative to said cross member;
a fastener joining said first member and said cross member; and
a biasing member attached to said first member and one of said second member and said cross member, said biasing member being in spaced relationship with said fastener, said biasing member displacing said first member to a biased position in which said first member is displaced from said cross member.
12. A barbeque grill housing support structure, comprising:
a first member and a second member for supporting said grill housing;
a cross member fastened between said first and second members to orient said first member in an initial position relative to said cross member, wherein said cross member is fastened to said first member; and
a biasing member attached to said first member and one of said second member and said cross member, and said biasing member maintains said first member in a biased position in which said first member is angularly displaced from said cross member relative to said initial position to provide additional friction between said first member and said cross member.
13. A barbeque grill housing support structure, comprising:
a first member and a second member for supporting said grill housing;
a cross member fastened between said first and second members to orient said first member in an initial position relative to said cross member, said cross member being fastened to said first member; and
a biasing member attached to said first member and said cross member, said biasing member displacing said first member to a biased position in which said first member is displaced from said cross member relative to said initial position.
Applications Claiming Priority (6)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CA2,348,316 | 2001-05-24 | ||
CA 2348316 CA2348316A1 (en) | 2001-05-24 | 2001-05-24 | Gas barbeque assembly |
CA2,354,785 | 2001-08-07 | ||
CA 2354785 CA2354785A1 (en) | 2001-05-24 | 2001-08-07 | Gas barbeque assembly |
CA2,363,985 | 2001-11-23 | ||
CA002363985A CA2363985A1 (en) | 2001-05-24 | 2001-11-23 | Supported gas barbeque assembly |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20020189604A1 true US20020189604A1 (en) | 2002-12-19 |
Family
ID=27171542
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US10/152,720 Abandoned US20020189604A1 (en) | 2001-05-24 | 2002-05-23 | Supported gas barbeque assembly |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (1) | US20020189604A1 (en) |
CA (1) | CA2363985A1 (en) |
Cited By (11)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20050247299A1 (en) * | 2004-05-07 | 2005-11-10 | Carlos Rodriguez | Quick assembly grill |
US20070051357A1 (en) * | 2005-09-02 | 2007-03-08 | Bruno Adrian A | Tank retainer |
EP1779040A1 (en) * | 2004-08-10 | 2007-05-02 | Weber-Stephen Products Co. | Barbecue grill fuel source support apparatus |
US20070221194A1 (en) * | 2006-03-27 | 2007-09-27 | Bruno Adrian A | Grill Structure |
US20090308374A1 (en) * | 2008-06-12 | 2009-12-17 | Char-Broil, Llc. | Cooking Grates and Grills Incorporating Such Grates |
AU2006233170B2 (en) * | 2005-11-03 | 2011-07-14 | Giovanni Scenna | Cooking apparatus |
US20110186561A1 (en) * | 2009-08-11 | 2011-08-04 | Mallik Ahmed | Electric patio bistro |
US8813738B2 (en) | 2011-03-03 | 2014-08-26 | W.C. Bradley Co. | Cooking grate assembly and cooking apparatus |
US9775465B2 (en) | 2012-05-15 | 2017-10-03 | W.C. Bradley Co. | Flame resistant cooking grate and cooking apparatus |
US10034578B2 (en) | 2014-08-21 | 2018-07-31 | W.C. Bradley Co. | High performance electric grill, method, and heat radiating module |
US20190346150A1 (en) * | 2018-05-14 | 2019-11-14 | Furrion Property Holding Limited | Flat top gas range, a counter containing, and a vehicle containing |
Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5065734A (en) * | 1990-12-17 | 1991-11-19 | Bernard Elliott | Portable convertible barbeque grill |
US6257229B1 (en) * | 2000-03-17 | 2001-07-10 | Sunbeam Products, Inc. | Collapsible cart for a barbecue grill |
US6422230B1 (en) * | 2000-07-31 | 2002-07-23 | Sunbeam Products, Inc. | Collapsible stand and barbecue grill assembly |
US6439220B1 (en) * | 2000-08-11 | 2002-08-27 | Weber-Stephen Products Co. | Barbecue grill and cart assembly |
US6561082B2 (en) * | 2001-08-10 | 2003-05-13 | W. C. Bradley Company | Quick assembly barbecue grill and cart assembly |
-
2001
- 2001-11-23 CA CA002363985A patent/CA2363985A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2002
- 2002-05-23 US US10/152,720 patent/US20020189604A1/en not_active Abandoned
Patent Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5065734A (en) * | 1990-12-17 | 1991-11-19 | Bernard Elliott | Portable convertible barbeque grill |
US6257229B1 (en) * | 2000-03-17 | 2001-07-10 | Sunbeam Products, Inc. | Collapsible cart for a barbecue grill |
US6422230B1 (en) * | 2000-07-31 | 2002-07-23 | Sunbeam Products, Inc. | Collapsible stand and barbecue grill assembly |
US6439220B1 (en) * | 2000-08-11 | 2002-08-27 | Weber-Stephen Products Co. | Barbecue grill and cart assembly |
US6561082B2 (en) * | 2001-08-10 | 2003-05-13 | W. C. Bradley Company | Quick assembly barbecue grill and cart assembly |
Cited By (24)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20050247299A1 (en) * | 2004-05-07 | 2005-11-10 | Carlos Rodriguez | Quick assembly grill |
US7328696B2 (en) * | 2004-05-07 | 2008-02-12 | Marshall Associates, Inc. | Quick assembly grill |
EP1779040A1 (en) * | 2004-08-10 | 2007-05-02 | Weber-Stephen Products Co. | Barbecue grill fuel source support apparatus |
EP1779040A4 (en) * | 2004-08-10 | 2012-05-02 | Weber Stephen Products Co | Barbecue grill fuel source support apparatus |
EP1920194A4 (en) * | 2005-09-02 | 2013-10-23 | Weber Stephen Products Co | Tank retainer |
US7753046B2 (en) * | 2005-09-02 | 2010-07-13 | Weber-Stephen Products Co. | Tank retainer |
EP1920194A2 (en) * | 2005-09-02 | 2008-05-14 | Weber-Stephen Products Co. | Tank retainer |
US20070051357A1 (en) * | 2005-09-02 | 2007-03-08 | Bruno Adrian A | Tank retainer |
AU2006287848B2 (en) * | 2005-09-02 | 2010-08-26 | Weber-Stephen Products Llc | Tank retainer |
NO338038B1 (en) * | 2005-09-02 | 2016-07-25 | Weber Stephen Products Co | Tank Holder |
AU2006233170B2 (en) * | 2005-11-03 | 2011-07-14 | Giovanni Scenna | Cooking apparatus |
US7810486B2 (en) * | 2006-03-27 | 2010-10-12 | Weber-Stephen Products Co. | Grill structure |
US20070221194A1 (en) * | 2006-03-27 | 2007-09-27 | Bruno Adrian A | Grill Structure |
WO2009152530A3 (en) * | 2008-06-12 | 2010-02-04 | Char-Broil, Llc | Cooking grates and grills incorporating such grates |
US20090308374A1 (en) * | 2008-06-12 | 2009-12-17 | Char-Broil, Llc. | Cooking Grates and Grills Incorporating Such Grates |
US9814352B2 (en) | 2008-06-12 | 2017-11-14 | Char-Broil, Llc | Cooking grates and grills incorporating such grates |
US20110186561A1 (en) * | 2009-08-11 | 2011-08-04 | Mallik Ahmed | Electric patio bistro |
US8399810B2 (en) | 2009-08-11 | 2013-03-19 | W. C. Bradley Co. | Electric patio bistro |
US8813738B2 (en) | 2011-03-03 | 2014-08-26 | W.C. Bradley Co. | Cooking grate assembly and cooking apparatus |
US9955817B2 (en) | 2011-03-03 | 2018-05-01 | W.C. Bradley Co. | Cooking grate assembly and cooking apparatus |
US9775465B2 (en) | 2012-05-15 | 2017-10-03 | W.C. Bradley Co. | Flame resistant cooking grate and cooking apparatus |
US10034578B2 (en) | 2014-08-21 | 2018-07-31 | W.C. Bradley Co. | High performance electric grill, method, and heat radiating module |
US20190346150A1 (en) * | 2018-05-14 | 2019-11-14 | Furrion Property Holding Limited | Flat top gas range, a counter containing, and a vehicle containing |
US11181282B2 (en) * | 2018-05-14 | 2021-11-23 | Furrion Property Holding Limited | Flat top gas range, a counter containing, and a vehicle containing |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
CA2363985A1 (en) | 2002-11-24 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US7207326B2 (en) | Gas barbeque assembly | |
US5979428A (en) | Wind guard attachment for portable gas cookers | |
US20020189604A1 (en) | Supported gas barbeque assembly | |
US5649475A (en) | Universal rotisserie assembly | |
US11725831B2 (en) | Wind guard system, device and method thereof | |
US20170231428A1 (en) | Apparatus for converting kettle or kamado style cooking grills for cooking pizza | |
US4403541A (en) | Heat trapping cooking grill | |
US5941229A (en) | Barbecue cart and side work shelf assembly | |
US6945160B2 (en) | Outdoor cooker and smoker apparatus | |
US11607079B2 (en) | Outdoor cooking station with warming chamber and method thereof | |
US5458054A (en) | Barbecue grill assembly | |
EP0332228B1 (en) | Portable gas grill | |
US11963634B2 (en) | Adjustable warming rack and method thereof | |
EP1285617B1 (en) | Support frame barcecue grill assembly | |
US20090250048A1 (en) | Adjustable burner kit for barbeque grills | |
US6672303B1 (en) | Barbecue grill | |
AU2002223315A1 (en) | Gas barbeque assembly | |
CA2348316A1 (en) | Gas barbeque assembly | |
WO2004069015A2 (en) | Barbeque assembly | |
US20210140648A1 (en) | Oven broiler drawer | |
CA2397217C (en) | Barbecue grill assembly with a shelf component | |
US10722068B2 (en) | Apparatus, system, and method for cooking a meal | |
CA2418515A1 (en) | Barbeque assembly | |
US3013549A (en) | Portable outdoor cooker | |
US6363926B1 (en) | Handle for a barbecue grill |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: FIESTA BARBEQUES LIMITED, CANADA Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:MCKENZIE, STUART T.;REEL/FRAME:013239/0156 Effective date: 20020328 |
|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |